Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutAlfred M Stiff Professional Building Bidding Documents 16 0110PROJECT MANUAL FOR: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION BOZEMAN, MONTANA JANUARY 10, 2016 121 NORTH ROUSE AVENUE 101 EAST MAIN STREET, STUDIO ONE BOZEMAN, MONTANA 59715 BOZEMAN, MONTANA 59715 PHONE: (406) 582-2306 PHONE: (406) 586-7020 (BLANK PAGE) TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 CALL FOR BIDS INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS BIDDER’S CHECKLIST BID FORM NON-DISCRIMINATION AFFIRMATION FORM NOTICE OF AWARD CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 2015 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012300 ALTERNATES 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 MASONRY (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) DIVISION 5 METALS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064600 WOOD TRIM 064800 WOOD FRAMES DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096816 SHEET CARPETING 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 233113 METAL DUCTS 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 271500 VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 311000 SITE CLEARING 312000 EARTH MOVING DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION 329200 TURF AND GRASSES 329300 PLANTS DIVISION 33 UTILITIES (NO SECTIONS THIS DIVISION) (BLANK PAGE) Call for Bids Page 1 of 3 CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA CALL FOR BIDS NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Bozeman, Montana, is accepting sealed bids for: ALFRED M. STILL PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION Separate sealed bids for construction of the above referenced project will be received by the City Clerk, City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, P.O. Box 1230, Bozeman, Montana 59771-1230 until 2:00 P.M. LOCAL TIME, FEBRUARY 2, 2016, and then publicly opened and read aloud. Please write the name of the project on the front of the sealed bid. The physical address is: City Clerk’s Office, Suite 102, City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, Bozeman, Montana. The mailing address is: City Clerk’s Office, Suite 102, City Hall, P.O. Box 1230, Bozeman, Montana, 59771. Bids must be received before 2 P.M. LOCAL TIME, FEBRUARY 2, 2016. Original copies must be submitted – no faxed or electronic bids will be accepted. Bids will be opened and read following the close of bids. The work involves the following: Limited interior renovation of existing partitions, casework, and finishes. Limited interior renovation of existing plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems. Limited site renovations, including excavation, concrete foundations, final grading, and landscaping. Installation of new windows. Bidding Documents will be available in electronic PDF format. Interested bidders should contract ThinkOne, 101 East Main, Studio One, Bozeman, Montana 59715, (406) 586-7020. Bidding Documents will be made available to the local builder’s exchange. Questions regarding the Bidding Documents should be directed to ThinkOne. A pre-bid conference for this project will be held at 10:00 a.m. local time, January 19, 2016 at the Alfred M. Stiff Professional Building, 20 East Olive, Bozeman, Montana. Call for Bids Page 2 of 3 All bids and proposals for the construction of the Project shall contain a statement showing that the bidder is duly and regularly registered under the laws of the State of Montana, and the bidder’s contractor's registration number shall appear upon such bid or proposal, and no contract shall be awarded to any bidder unless such bidder is the holder of registration, all as defined by MCA 39-9-101 through 410. Forms for registration are available from the Department of Labor and Industry, P.O. Box 8011, 1805 Prospect, Helena, Montana, 59604-8011. Information on registration can be obtained by calling 1-406-444-7734. All laborers and mechanics employed by contractors or sub-contractors in performance of the construction work shall be paid wages at rates as may be required by the laws of the State of Montana. Discrimination in the performance of any contract awarded under this invitation on the basis of race, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability is prohibited. This prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the awarded entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. Every entity submitting under this Call for Bids must sign and return the required non-discrimination affirmation. Each bid must be accompanied by a Certified Check, Cashier's Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Bozeman, Montana, in an amount not less than Ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. Successful bidders shall furnish an approved Performance Bond and a labor and materials Payment Bond, each in the amount of One Hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount. Insurance as required shall be provided by the successful bidder(s) and a Certificate(s) of that insurance or other evidence of insurance as required by the City shall be provided. No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled time for the public opening of bids for a period of sixty (60) days. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids received, to waive informalities, to postpone the award of the contract for a period of not to exceed Sixty (60) days, and to accept the bid which is in the best interests of the City. The City of Bozeman is an Equal Opportunity Employer. Call for Bids Page 3 of 3 Dated at Bozeman, Montana, this 10th day of January, 2016. Stacy Ulmen, CMC City Clerk, City of Bozeman Published Bozeman, Montana January 10, 2016 January 17, 2016 January 24, 2016 (BLANK PAGE) Instructions to Bidders Page 1 of 9 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BIDS: All Bids must be made on the forms provided in the Contract Documents. All Bids must be legibly written in ink, with total Bid amount given in words and figures. No alterations by erasures or interlineations will be permitted in Bids or in the printed forms. Each Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to the City Clerk, City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, P.O. Box 1230, Bozeman, Montana 59771-1230, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope with the words: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING, INTERIOR ALTERATION, CITY OF BOZEMAN. Bids shall be strictly in accordance with the prescribed form. Any modifications thereof or deviations therefrom may be considered as sufficient cause for rejection. Bids carrying riders or qualifications to the Bid being submitted may be rejected as irregular. BID SECURITY: To be considered, the Bid must be accompanied by a bid security unconditionally payable to the City of Bozeman for ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. Each Bidder shall expressly covenant in the Bid that if the Bidder is awarded the contract, the Bidder will, within thirty (30) days after the Bid is awarded, enter into a formal contract and give an approved performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the contract. Bid security must be provided in a form specified in §18-1-203, MCA, which includes, but is not limited to, certified check, cashier’s check, bank draft, bid bond, guaranty bond, or surety bond. Bid security through a bid, guaranty or surety bond must be issued by a surety company authorized to do business in the State of Montana. The Bid security protects and indemnifies the City against the failure or refusal of the successful Bidder to timely enter into the contract. SIGNATURE OF BIDDERS: Each Bid must be signed in ink by the Bidder with the Bidder’s full name and with its business address or place of residence. In case of a firm or partnership, the name and residence of each member must be inserted. In case the Bid is submitted by, or on behalf of, a corporation, it must be signed in the name of such corporation by an official who is authorized to bind the corporation, and who shall also affix the corporate seal of such corporation. The Bid of a corporation which is signed by a person other than a corporate officer must be accompanied by a Power of Attorney showing that person's authority. ONLY ONE PROPOSAL: No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Two Bids under different names will not be received from one firm or association. RESPONSIBILITIES OF AGENT: Any person signing a Bid as the agent of another, or of others, may be required to submit satisfactory evidence of the authority to do so. The title of the person(s) executing the Bid or Agreement shall be clearly indicated beneath his signature. TITLE: The position title of any person executing the Bid and Agreement shall be clearly indicated beneath the authorized person’s signature. Instructions to Bidders Page 2 of 9 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS: Bidders may be required to submit satisfactory evidence that they have a practical knowledge of the particular work bid upon, and that they have the necessary financial resources to complete the proposed work. In determining the lowest responsible Bid, City will consider the following elements: whether the Bidder involved (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously; (c) has a suitable financial status to meet obligations incident to the work; and (d) has appropriate technical experience and experience in projects of comparable scope and complexity that were satisfactorily completed. Each Bidder may be required to show that former work performed by it has been handled in such a manner that there are no just or proper claims pending against such work. No Bidder will be acceptable if the Bidder is engaged on any other work which impairs its ability to finance its Agreement with the City. The Bidder shall demonstrate its ability by meeting all requirements herein stipulated, when requested. Bidder is not deemed a responsible bidder if Bidder is delinquent in payment of property taxes or special improvement district assessments for at least six (6) months. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The principle Contract Documents for this Project include, but are not limited to, the following: Call For Bids Instructions To Bidders Bidders Checklist Bid Form Non-Discrimination Affirmation Form Notice of Award Construction Agreement Performance Bond Payment Bond Montana Prevailing Wage Rates for Building Construction Services; January 2, 2015 Technical Specifications Construction Drawings EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE: Before submitting a Bid, each Instructions to Bidders Page 3 of 9 Bidder must: (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with location conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; (c) become familiar with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents. On request, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such investigations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Any administrative requirements and associated costs of such investigations are the responsibility of the Bidder. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Bidder in performing the Work are identified in the specifications or on the drawings. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this section and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the work. Where logs of test borings are included in the contract plans, such logs do not constitute a part of the Agreement and are included only for the convenience of the Bidder and do not relieve the Bidder of its duties under this section or of any other responsibility under the Construction Agreement. No information derived from any inspection of records of investigation or compilation thereof made by the City will in any way relieve the Bidder from properly performing its obligations under the Construction Agreement. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: If any person contemplating submitting a Bid for this project is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications, or other proposed Contract Documents, such person may submit to the City a written request for an interpretation thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the proposed documents will be made only by an addendum duly issued and a copy of any such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person requesting a set of such documents. TIME OF COMPLETION: The time of completion of the Work is a basic consideration of the Agreement. It will be necessary that the Bidder satisfy the City of the Bidder’s ability to complete the Work within the stipulated time. ADDENDA: Any addenda issued during the time of bidding, or forming a part of the Contract Documents loaned to the Bidder for the preparation of a proposal, shall be covered in the Bid and shall be made a part of the Construction Agreement. Receipt of each addendum shall be acknowledged in the Bid. Any Bid in which all issued addenda are not acknowledged will be Instructions to Bidders Page 4 of 9 considered incomplete and will not be read. PROPOSAL: The Bidder shall submit his proposal on the forms bound in these Contract Documents. Proposals shall be in a sealed envelope and addressed to: City Clerk City Hall 121 N. Rouse Avenue P.O. Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 The envelope shall also contain the following information: Name of Project: Name of Bidder:___________________________________________ Montana Certificate of Contractor Registration No.____________ Acknowledge Receipt of Addendum No.:_____,_____,_____,_____. In the lower left hand corner of the envelope print or type: BID DOCUMENTS - DO NOT OPEN UNTIL 2:00 P.M., FEBRUARY 2, 2016. Proposals shall be made in accordance with the following instructions: A. Bids shall be made in ink upon the unaltered Bid Proposal Form supplied with these documents. B. All blank spaces must be properly filled. C. The total Bid price must be stated in both writing and in figures. In case of a discrepancy between unit price and total Bid price, the unit prices or lump sum prices shall be used in computing the total Bid price. D. The proposal form shall contain no additions, conditions, stipulations, erasures, or other irregularities. E. The proposal must acknowledge receipt of all addenda issued. F. The proposal must be signed in ink and display the Bidder's name, address, and current Montana Contractor's License Number. Instructions to Bidders Page 5 of 9 SIGNING OF BIDS: Bids which are not signed by individuals making them shall have attached thereto a power of attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid in the name of the person for whom it is signed. Bids which are signed for a co-partnership shall be signed by all of the co-partners or by an attorney- in-fact. If signed by an attorney-in-fact, there shall be attached to the Bid a power of attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid. Bids which are signed for a corporation shall have the correct corporate name thereof signed in handwriting or in typewriting and the signature of the president or other authorized officer of the corporation shall be manually written below the written or typewritten corporate name following the work: By:__________________________________ _________________Corporate Seal Title:______________________________ If Bids are signed for any other legal entity, the authority of the person signing for such legal entity should be attached to the Bid. BID REQUIREMENTS The Bidder is expected to base its bid on materials and equipment complying fully with the plans and specifications and, in the event the Bidder names in its bid materials or equipment which do not conform, the Bidder will be responsible for furnishing materials and equipment which fully conform at no charge in its bid price. Before submitting a proposal, each Bidder should read the complete Contract Documents (including all addenda, if such exist), specifications and plans, including all related documents containing herein, all of which contain provisions applicable not only to the successful Bidder, but also to such Bidder’s subcontractors. BID QUANTITIES: Bidders must satisfy themselves by personal examination of the locations of the proposed Work and by such other means as they may prefer as to the correctness of any quantities. The estimated unit quantities of the various classes of work to be done are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the proposals offered for the Work. The Bidder agrees that, during progress of the Work, the City may find it advisable to omit portions of the Work, to increase or decrease the quantities as may be deemed Instructions to Bidders Page 6 of 9 necessary or desirable, that the actual amount of Work to be done and materials to be furnished may differ from the estimated quantities, and that the basis for payment shall be the actual amount of Work done and the materials furnished. The Bidder agrees it will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits or otherwise on account of any difference which may be found between quantities of Work actually done and the estimated quantities. WITHDRAWAL OF BID: No Bidder may withdraw any bid for a period as specified in the Request For Bid after the date and hour set for the opening declared herein. Prior to that time, Bidder may withdraw a Bid by written request. The request to withdraw a bid must be signed in the same manner and by the same person or persons who signed the Bid. ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION OF THE BIDS: The City reserves the right to accept or reject the Bids, or portions of Bids if denoted in the Bid as separate schedules, and to award more than one Bid or schedule for the same Bid if any of the aforementioned combination of Bids or schedules will be in the best interest of the City. The City reserves the right to waive irregularities in any Bid submitted, or reject nonconforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids and to correct arithmetical errors in the Bid prior to comparison. SUBCONTRACTORS: Within thirty (30) days after Bids are opened, the apparent low Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall submit a list of all Subcontractors the Bidder expects to use in the work. An experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification shall be furnished for each named subcontractor, if requested by the City. If the City or its representative engineer or architect after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, they may, before giving the Notice of Award, request the apparent low Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute. If the substitution results in an increase in the Bid, a corresponding adjustment will be made in the contract price. If the apparent low Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the contract may not be awarded to such Bidder, but Bidder's refusal to substitution will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of Bid Security. Any subcontractor so listed and to whom City or its representative engineer or architect does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to the City and its representative engineer or architect. Bidder shall not be required to employ any subcontractor against whom the Bidder has reasonable objection. The use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by City prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the work unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the City. AWARD OF CONTRACT: If the Construction Agreement is to be awarded, City will award the Instructions to Bidders Page 7 of 9 Construction Agreement to the responsible Bidder whose Bid is responsive and conforms with all material terms and conditions of the bidding documents and proposed Contract Documents, is lowest in price, is in the best interest of the project and the City, and other factors considered. The award will be based on the lowest responsive cumulative base Bid plus any added alternate schedules the City determines to include with the project. If the Construction Agreement is awarded, the award will be made within the period specified in the Request For Bid. The successful Bidder will be notified by letter mailed to the address shown on the Bid that the bid has been accepted and that Bidder has been awarded the contract. CANCELLATION OF AWARD: The City reserves the right to cancel the award of any Agreement at any time and for any reason or no reason before the complete execution of the Agreement by all parties without any liability against the City. RETURN OF BID GUARANTEE: All Bid guarantees, except those of the three lowest Bidders, will be returned immediately following the opening and checking of the Bids. The Bid guarantees of the unsuccessful of the three lowest Bidders will be returned within ten (10) days following the award of the Agreement. The Bid guarantee of the Bidder to whom the contract is awarded will be returned when said Bidder has executed an Agreement and filed satisfactory Performance and Payment Bonds as hereinafter stipulated. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: The Bidder to whom the Construction Agreement is awarded will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond (the “Bonds”) in favor of the City. The Bonds must be in an amount equal to one-hundred percent (100%) of the Construction Agreement amount. The Bonds shall be executed on the forms bound herein, signed by a surety company authorized to do business in the State of Montana, and acceptable as a surety to the City and countersigned by a Montana Resident Agent. With the Bonds, there shall be filed with the City one copy of Power of Attorney certified to include the date of the Bond. EXECUTION AND APPROVAL OF CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT: The Construction Agreement shall be signed by the successful Bidder and returned, together with the Bonds, within the time shown on the Bid. If the Agreement is not executed by the City within fifteen (15) days following receipt from the Bidder of the signed Construction Agreement and Bonds, the Bidder shall have the right to withdraw its Bid without penalty. No Construction Agreement shall be considered as effective until it has been fully executed by all of the parties thereto. INSURANCE: The successful Bidder, as part of the Construction Agreement, shall provide liability insurance and other insurances and maintain required workers’ compensation coverage all as indicated in the Construction Agreement. Bidder shall provide proof of these through either a certificate of insurance or a current copy of Bidder’s policy documents as required by the City. Instructions to Bidders Page 8 of 9 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT: Failure to execute the Construction Agreement and furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be just cause for annulment of the award. In the event of such annulment of the award, the Bid guarantee shall be forfeited to the City, not as a penalty but as liquidation of damages sustained. Award may then be made to the next lowest responsible and qualified Bidder, or the work may be re-advertised as the City may decide. PAYMENTS: Payment for all Work performed under the Agreement will be made by the City within the time period specified in and in accordance with the procedures outlined herein. When the Work extends beyond thirty (30) days, progress payments will be made monthly for any work accomplished during the preceding month, but subject to retainage as specified elsewhere. PREVAILING WAGE RATES: In all public works contracts with the City, contractors and their subcontractors shall pay for each job classification the standard prevailing wage rate, including fringe benefits. The standard prevailing wage rate as used herein means the standard prevailing rate of wages in the locality where the work is to be performed as determined by the Montana Commissioner of Labor & Industry pursuant to §18-2-402, MCA, and as bound herein to the proposed Construction Agreement. The Bidder and Bidder’s subcontractors are directed to the Montana Commissioner of Labor & Industry for information on the standard prevailing rate of wages applicable to this project within this area. POSTING: Contractor shall post in a prominent and accessible place on the site of the work a legible statement of all wages to be paid to the employees. LOCAL LABOR: Contractor shall give preference to the employment of Montana residents in accordance with applicable portions of Title 18, Chapter 2, Part 4, MCA. MONTANA CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS: No Bids will be considered that do not carry the Bidder's Certificate of Contractor's Registration number on the envelope containing the Bid and on the Bid. Information pertaining to the Montana Contractor Registration requirements may be obtained from the Montana State Department of Revenue, Helena, Montana. (1-406-444-7734) ADDITIONAL CONTRACTOR LICENSE FEE (MONTANA CONTRACTORS GROSS RECEIPTS TAX): In accordance with Title 15, Chapter 50, MCA, the City shall withhold, in addition to other amounts withheld as provided by law or specified herein, 1 percent (1%) of all payments due the Contractor and shall transmit such moneys to the Montana Department of Revenue. BIDDER PREFERENCE: In accordance with the provisions of Title 18, Chapter 1, Part 1, MCA, a preference will be given to the lowest responsible Bidder who is a resident of the State of Montana over a nonresident Bidder from any state or country that enforces a preference in their state or Instructions to Bidders Page 9 of 9 country for their resident Bidders. The preference given to Montana resident Bidders will be equal to the preference given in the other state or country. This preference applies unless specifically prohibited by Federal laws or regulations. Products manufactured or produced in the State of Montana shall be preferred for use in all projects if such products are comparable in price and quality. Further, wherever possible, products manufactured and produced in the State which are suitable substitutes for products manufactured or produced outside the State and comparable in price, quality and performance shall be preferred for use in this project. Preference regarding these products shall be in accordance with the laws of the State of Montana. CITY OF BOZEMAN BUSINESS LICENSE: All Bidders conducting work within the City of Bozeman are required to have a current Business License. Applications for Business Licenses may be obtained at City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, Bozeman, Montana. NON-DISCRIMINATION: In accordance with law, Bidder shall agree not to discriminate against any client, employee, or applicant for employment or for services because of race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, physical or mental disability, or national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation or gender identity. It is further understood that any vendor who is in violation of this clause shall be barred forthwith from receiving awards of any purchase from the City of Bozeman unless a satisfactory showing is made that discriminatory practices have ceased, and the recurrence of such acts is unlikely. Every entity submitting under this invitation must sign and return the required affirmation. (BLANK PAGE) BIDDER’S CHECKLIST Please utilize the following Bidder’s Checklist before submitting your bid. _____1) Original Bid Bond Enclosed? (Personal checks, business checks, and faxed copies are not acceptable.) _____2) Bid Proposal: a.___Bid amount correctly written out in words and numerals? b.___All Addenda acknowledged on proposal sheet and cover? c.___Signature portion completely filled out? d.___Non-Discrimination Affirmation form completed and signed? ____3) Bid Envelope: a.___Addressed properly? (See Instructions to Bidders) b.___Contains Bid Form and Bid Security c.___Acknowledged Receipt of Addenda? d.___Sealed? ____4) Bid Submitted prior to required time at specified location? Be sure to seal your bid. Include project name, bid date/time, contractor name, contractor registration number, and acknowledgement of all addenda (by number) on the outside of the bid envelope. ALL BID DOCUMENTS AND BONDS MUST BE ORIGINALS. NO FAXED COPIES WILL BE ACCEPTED. (BLANK PAGE) Bid Form Page 1 of 8 BID FORM ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION CITY OF BOZEMAN BOZEMAN, MONTANA 59771 TO: City Clerk P.O. Box 1230 Bozeman, Montana 59771-1230 THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having become familiar with the Work required by the Contract Documents, the site(s) where the Work is to be performed, local labor conditions and all laws, regulations, municipal ordinances and other factors which may affect the performance of the Work, and having become satisfied of the expense and difficulties attending performance of the Work: HEREBY PROPOSES and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement, in the form included in the Contract Documents, to perform all Work for the construction of the project, including the assumption of all obligations, duties, and responsibilities necessary for the successful completion of the Agreement and the furnishing of all materials and equipment required to be incorporated in, and form a permanent part of, the Work; tools, equipment, supplies, transportation, facilities, labor, superintendence, and services required to perform the Work; bonds, insurance and other required submittals; all as indicated or specified in the Contract Documents to be performed or furnished by the successful Bidder. The undersigned Bidder agrees to be bound by this Bid for a period not to exceed that specified in the Invitation for Bids. The undersigned Bidder agrees to furnish the required Bonds and to enter into the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days after the City’s award of this Bid, and further agrees to complete all Work within the time specified after commencement of the Agreement time as defined in the specifications. The allowed time to complete the Work is specified in the Agreement. Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the time specified in the Agreement. The undersigned Bidder agrees that it has been afforded access to the construction site and has performed those independent site investigations as the Bidder deemed necessary. The undersigned Bidder hereby certifies the following: Bid Form Page 2 of 8 A. That this Bid is genuine and is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation, and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation; B. That Bidder has not directly or indirectly solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham Bid; C. That the Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding; D. That the Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over the City; E. That the Bidder is not currently operating beyond the contract time on any previously awarded public works contract; F. That this Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the opening of bids, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of City; G. That no official of the City, no consulting engineer or architect, or any member of such official’s or consulting engineer’s or architect’s immediate family has direct or indirect interest in the pecuniary profits or contracts of the Bidder; and H. That Bidder is a responsible Bidder and has the required qualifications and experience as submitted by Bidder on the Qualifications attached hereto as Exhibit 3. The undersigned Bidder(s) either singularly or as a joint venture hereby certifies (certify) that he (they) is (are) duly and regularly licensed. BIDDER agrees to perform all the work described in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the total sum as follows: TOTAL BASE BID $__________________________ (TOTAL BASE BID – WRITTEN WORDS) TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 1 BID $__________________________ (TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 1 BID – WRITTEN WORDS) Bid Form Page 3 of 8 The undersigned Bidder acknowledged receipt of the following Addenda, which have been considered in preparation of this Bid: No._____________________________ Dated____________________ No._____________________________ Dated____________________ No._____________________________ Dated____________________ No._____________________________ Dated___________________ Submitted this _____ day of _____________________, 2016. SIGNATURE OF BIDDER:__________________________________________ Montana Contractor Registration Number______________________________ If an individual:_____________________________________________ doing business as_____________________________________________ If a Partnership:___________________________________________by ________________________________________, partner _____________________________________________ If a Corporation:_____________________________________________ (a) ____________________________________________ by ____________________________________________ (Seal & Title___________________________________________ Attest) Business Address of Bidder: __________________________________ _______________________________________________ Bid Form Page 4 of 8 If Bidder is a joint venture, other party must sign below: Montana License Number and Class______________________________ If an Individual:_______________________________________ doing business as _________________________________________________. If a Partnership: __________________________________________ by ________________________________Partner __________________________________________ If a Corporation:____________________________________________ (a)______________________________Corporation by _________________________________________ (Seal & Title________________________________________ Attest) Bid Form Page 5 of 8 Exhibit 1 Bid Security Attached. Bid Form Page 6 of 8 Exhibit 2 Bid Sheet Attached. Bid Form Page 7 of 8 Exhibit 3 Qualifications Bid Form Page 8 of 8 Exhibit 4 Receipt Of Addendum Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addendum of revisions or additions: Addendum Number Date Issued Authorized Signature For Each 1 2 3 4 5 NON-DISCRIMINATION AFFIRMATION FORM _______________________________ [name of entity submitting] hereby affirms it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability in the performance of work performed for the city of Bozeman, if a contract is awarded to it, and also recognizes the eventual contract, if awarded, will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and that this prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the _____________________ [name of entity submitting] employees and to all subcontracts it enters into in performance of the agreement with the city of Bozeman. Signature of Bidder: _______________________________ Person authorized to sign on behalf of the bidder (BLANK PAGE) NOTICE OF AWARD Dated: TO: [insert name of successful bidder] ADDRESS: [insert successful bidder’s mailing address] PROJECT: City of Bozeman [insert simple project title] CONTRACT FOR: [insert brief statement of the project]. You are notified that your Bid dated [insert date of the successful bid], for the above Contract has been considered. You are the apparent Successful Bidder and have been awarded a Contract [insert brief statement on the work (same as above). The Contract Price of your Contract is: [write out the contract amount] Dollars ($[insert the numerical amount). You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is, by [insert date __ days after the award] . 1. You must deliver to the OWNER 3 fully executed counterparts of the Agreement. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instruction to Bidders. 3. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Certificates of Insurance as specified in the Agreement. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle the City to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award, and to declare your Bid Security forfeit. Within ten (10) days after you comply with these conditions, the City will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA ATTEST: BY: __________________________________ BY: ____________________________ (CITY MANAGER) (CITY CLERK) DATE: _______________________________ (BLANK PAGE) Page 1 of 28 Version 12 14 15 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT This Construction Agreement is made this _____ day of _______________, 20___, by and between the CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Montana, P.O. Box 1231, Bozeman, Montana 59771-1231 (“City”), and _____________________________________, a _____________________, of _____________________, (“Contractor”). Recitals A. The City issued an Invitation to Bid for the construction project known as ___________________________ (“Construction Project”) pursuant to the requirements of all applicable statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances. B. The City analyzed all responses to the Invitation to Bid received pursuant to its standard practices and the requirements of all applicable statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances. C. The City awarded the bid to Contractor on _______________, pursuant to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the covenants, agreements, representations, and warranties contained herein, the parties agree as follows: Agreement 1. Work to be Performed: a. A description of the Construction Project and Contractor’s duties is set forth in the Invitation to Bid and Bid Form as awarded and accepted by City and the Construction Documents for the [insert name of project], which are attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, and the drawings, plans, and specifications provided by the City and its architects and engineers. The City’s Notice of Award is attached here as Exhibit A. Where a provision of any other portion of the Construction Documents conflicts with this Agreement, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall control. b. Prior to the commencement of any work on the Construction Project, Contractor’s representatives and City’s representatives shall hold a meeting to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the scope of the Construction Project and duties of the Contractor. At this meeting, Contractor and City shall resolve any outstanding issues related to the plans, designs, drawings, and specifications. If the parties are unable to resolve these issues and the City fails, refuses, or is unable to approve the same, no work shall commence on the Construction Project until such issues are resolved and the City approves the related plans, designs, drawings, and specifications. Page 2 of 28 Version 12 14 15 c. Except as provided elsewhere in this Agreement, Contractor shall furnish all the labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services necessary to perform and complete the Construction Project. d. During work on the Construction Project, and as part of the final completion of the Construction Project, Contractor shall clean up the Project site, including the removal and satisfactory disposal of all waste, garbage, excess materials, equipment, temporary buildings, the removal or grading of all embankments made for construction purposes, the filling in of all excavations, and the performance of any other work necessary to restore the site to at least as good order and condition as at the commencement of the Construction Project. 2. City-Supplied Materials: The City may supply materials from time to time in furtherance of the Construction Project. Such materials will be noted as an addendum to this Agreement. 3. Time of Performance: a. Contractor shall begin the Construction Project after receiving a Notice to Proceed from City and shall complete the Construction Project within sixty (60) days of the starting date stated in the Notice to Proceed. After receiving the Notice to Proceed from the City Contractor shall develop a Construction Schedule for approval by the City which shall become part of this Agreement. [option: The various phases of the Construction Project shall be completed pursuant to the Construction Schedule attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by this reference]. Time is of the essence of completion of all work and each phase of the Construction Project. b. The Construction Schedule is subject to the City’s approval. Contractor’s construction plan, methods of operation, materials used, and individuals and subcontractors employed (collectively “Contractor’s Resources”) are subject to the City’s approval at all times during the term of this Agreement, and must be such as to ensure the completion of the work in compliance with the deadlines set in the Construction Schedule during the term of this Agreement. In the event the City determines the Contractor’s Resources are inadequate to meet the approved Construction Schedule, the City may order the Contractor to accelerate its performance to give reasonable assurances of timely completion and quality results. Acceleration under this section shall not be deemed a Change Order as defined in Section 5b below and the Contractor shall receive no equitable adjustment for such acceleration. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities to plan for and complete the work in a timely manner according to the Construction Schedule. 4. Liquidated Damages: If the Construction Project is not completed within the time provided by this Agreement, the City may deduct for each day the Construction Project remains uncompleted the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) from the compensation Page 3 of 28 Version 12 14 15 hereinafter specified and retain that sum as payment for liquidated damages sustained by reason of the Contractor’s failure to complete the Construction Project on time. 5. Compensation: a. City shall pay to Contractor, and Contractor shall accept as full payment for the performance of this Agreement and the Construction Project, the amount of __________________ ($_________), as paid in accordance with Exhibit D, Compensation Schedule, attached hereto. b. If work not included within the original Construction Documents is requested by City, such additional work and the related compensation shall be agreed to in writing by both parties prior to commencement of the additional work (“Change Order”) pursuant to the Change of Work Specifications set forth on Exhibit E attached hereto. c. Monthly progress payments and final payment will be made only in accordance with the terms of a completed Compensation Schedule to be approved by the City’s Representative. All invoices must be submitted to the City’s Representative. d. City shall retain five percent (5%) of the total amount of compensation to be paid to the Contractor to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the timely completion of the Construction Project and any and all “punch list” items (“Retainage Amount”). The Retainage Amount shall be paid to Contractor thirty (30) days after the City’s final acceptance of the portion of work for which a separate price is stated in the specifications for the Construction Project. e. Upon acceptance of final payment and for other good and valuable consideration, Contractor shall and hereby does release and forever discharge City, its officers, agents, and employees of and from any and all claims, demands, actions, causes of action, obligations, and liabilities of every kind and character whatsoever, in law and in equity, whether now known or in the future discovered, arising from or related to this Agreement or the Construction Project that Contractor may have or assert against City, its officers, agents, and employees. 6. Inspection and Testing: a. City has the right to inspect and test any and all work performed by Contractor on the Construction Project. Contractor shall allow City and its agents access to the Construction Project at all times and shall provide every reasonable facility for the purpose of such inspection and testing, including temporarily discontinuing portions of the work or uncovering or taking down portions of the finished work. Any inspection and testing performed by the City and its agents is for the sole benefit of the City and shall not relieve the Contractor of its duty, responsibility, and obligation to ensure that the Page 4 of 28 Version 12 14 15 work strictly complies with the Agreement terms and conditions and all applicable laws and building and safety codes. City’s inspection and testing shall not be deemed or considered acceptance by the City of any portion of the Construction Project. City’s inspection and testing shall not serve to nullify, amend, or waive any warranties provided by the Contractor under this Agreement. b. Contractor shall, without charge, replace any material or correct any work found by the City or its agents to be defective or otherwise not in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In the event Contractor fails to replace or correct any defective work or materials after reasonable written notice by the City to do so, the City may take such corrective action, either with its own materials and employees or by retaining any third party to do so, and deduct the cost and expense of such corrective action from the Contractor’s compensation. 7. Partial Utilization of Construction Project: City shall have the right to use or occupy any portion of the Construction Project that City and Contractor mutually agree is substantially completed and constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Construction Project for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remaining portions of the Construction Project. In the event City takes possession of any portion of the Construction Project, such possession shall not be deemed an acceptance of the Construction Project, in whole or in part. Contractor shall still be required to conduct any final testing of the portions in the possession of the City. City’s use of any portion of the Construction Project shall not be grounds for extensions of any construction deadlines or a change in the Contractor’s compensation. Contractor’s warranties shall run from the completion of the total Construction Project and not from the date the City may take possession of selected portions of the Construction Project. 8. Related Work at the Site: Nothing in this Agreement shall prevent or preclude City, through its own employees or by contract with any third party, from performing other work related to the Construction Project at the construction site; provided such related work is not otherwise addressed in this Agreement and provided such related work does not otherwise interfere with Contractor’s performance of this Agreement or the completion of the Construction Project. Contractor shall afford any City employee, agent or representative, or any third party under contract with the City to perform the related work, proper and safe access to the construction site, a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment, the opportunity to perform the related work, and shall properly coordinate the Contractor’s work on the Construction Project with the related work. 9. Contractor’s Warranties: Contractor represents and warrants as follows: a. Unless otherwise specified by the terms of this Agreement, all materials and equipment used by Contractor on the Construction Project shall be new and where not otherwise specified, of the most suitable grade for their intended uses. b. All workmanship and materials shall be of a kind and nature acceptable to the City. Page 5 of 28 Version 12 14 15 c. All equipment, materials, and labor provided to, on, or for the Construction Project must be free of defects and nonconformities in design, materials, and workmanship for a minimum period beginning with the commencement of the work on the Construction Project and ending one (1) year from the final completion and acceptance by the City of the Construction Project, regardless of whether such equipment, materials, or labor were supplied directly by Contractor or indirectly by Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers. Other express warranties on materials that provide for a warranty period longer than one year apply for the period of that express warranty and are not reduced by this provision. Upon receipt of City’s written notice of a defective or nonconforming condition during the warranty period, Contractor shall take all actions, including redesign and replacement, to correct the defective or nonconforming condition within a time frame acceptable to the City and at no additional cost to the City. Contractor shall also, at its sole cost, perform any tests required by City to verify that such defective or nonconforming condition has been corrected. Contractor warrants the corrective action taken against defective and nonconforming conditions for a period of an additional one (1) year from the date of City’s acceptance of the corrective action. d. Contractor and its sureties are liable for the satisfaction and full performance of all warranties. e. Contractor shall give its personal attention to the faithful prosecution of the completion of the Construction Project and Contractor, or its duly authorized representative assigned to serve as the Construction Project Manager, shall be personally present at the site of the Construction Project during working hours for the term of this Agreement until the completion of the Construction Project. f. Contractor shall have a complete, accurate, and up-to-date set of construction plans, drawings, and specifications on site at all times. g. Contractor has examined all available records and made field examinations of the site of the Construction Project. Contractor has knowledge of the field conditions to be encountered during the Construction Project. Contractor has knowledge of the types and character of equipment necessary for the work, the types of materials needed and the sources of such materials, and the condition of the local labor market. h. Contractor is responsible for the safety of the work and shall maintain all lights, guards, signs, temporary passages, or other protections necessary for that purpose at all times. i. All work must be performed at Contractor’s risk, and Contractor shall promptly repair or replace all damage and loss at its sole cost and expense regardless of the reason or cause of the damage or loss; provided, however, should the damage or loss Page 6 of 28 Version 12 14 15 be caused by an intentional or negligent act of the City, the risk of such loss shall be placed on the City. j. Contractor is responsible for any loss or damage to materials, tools, or other articles used or held for use in the completion of performance of the Construction Project. k. Contractor’s performance must be without damage or disruption to any other work or property of the City or of others and without interference with the operation of existing machinery or equipment. l. Title to all work, materials, and equipment covered by any payment of Contractor’s compensation by City, whether directly incorporated into the Construction Project or not, passes to City at the time of payment, free and clear of all liens and encumbrances. 10. Delays and Extensions of Time: If Contractor’s performance of this Agreement is prevented or delayed by any unforeseen cause beyond the control of the Contractor, including acts or omissions of the City, Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the commencement of any such delay, give the City written notice thereof. Further, Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the termination of such delay, give the City written notice of the total actual duration of the delay. If the City is provided with these required notices and if the City determines that the cause of the delay was not foreseeable, was beyond the control of the Contractor, and was not a result of the fault or negligence of the Contractor, then the City will determine the total duration of the delay and extend the time for performance of the Agreement accordingly. Unless the delay is caused by the intentional interference of the City with the Contractor’s performance, Contractor shall make no claim for damages or any other claim other than for an extension of time as herein provided by reason of any delays. 11. Suspension: a. The City may, by written notice to the Contractor and at its convenience for any reason, suspend the performance of all or any portion of the work to be performed on the Construction Project (“Notice of Suspension”). The Notice of Suspension shall set forth the time of suspension, if then known to the City. During the period of suspension, Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize costs associated with the suspension. b. Upon Contractor’s receipt of any Notice of Suspension, unless the notice requires otherwise, Contractor shall: (1) immediately discontinue work on the date and to the extent specified in the Notice of Suspension; (2) place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or equipment; (3) promptly make every reasonable effort to obtain suspension upon terms satisfactory to City of all orders, subcontracts, and rental agreements to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work suspended; and (4) continue to protect and maintain the Project, including those portions on which work has been suspended. Page 7 of 28 Version 12 14 15 c. As compensation for the suspended work, Contractor will be reimbursed for the following costs, reasonably incurred, without duplication of any item, and to the extent that such costs directly resulted from the suspension: (1) a standby charge paid during the period of suspension which will be sufficient to compensate Contractor for keeping, to the extent required in the Notice of Suspension, Contractor’s organization and equipment committed to the Project in standby status; (2) all reasonably incurred costs for the demobilization of Contractor’s and subcontractor’s crews and equipment; (3) an equitable amount to reimburse Contractor for the cost to protect and maintain the Project during the period of suspension; and (4) an equitable adjustment in the cost of performing the remaining portion of the work post-suspension if, as a direct result of the suspension, the cost to Contractor of subsequently performing the remaining work on the Construction Project has increased or decreased. d. Upon receipt of written notice by the City to resume the suspended work (“Notice to Resume Work”), Contractor shall immediately resume performance of the suspended work as to the extent required in the Notice to Resume Work. Any claim by Contractor for time or compensation described in Section 11(c) shall be made within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice to Resume Work and Contractor shall submit a revised Construction Schedule for the City’s review and approval. Contractor’s failure to timely make such a claim shall result in a waiver of the claim. e. No compensation described in Section 11(c) shall be paid and no extension of time to complete the Construction Project shall be granted if the suspension results from Contractor’s non-compliance with or breach of the terms or requirements of this Agreement. 12. Termination for Contractor’s Fault: a. If Contractor refuses or fails to timely do the work, or any part thereof, or fails to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement, or otherwise breaches any terms or conditions of this Agreement, the City may, by written notice, terminate this Agreement and the Contractor’s right to proceed with all or any part of the Construction Project (“Termination Notice Due to Contractor’s Fault”). The City may then take over the Construction Project and complete it, either with its own resources or by re-letting the contract to any other third party, and may immediately take possession of and use such materials, appliances, tools, and equipment as may be on the site and which may be necessary for the completion of the Construction Project. b. In the event of a termination pursuant to this Section 12, Contractor shall be entitled to payment only for those services Contractor actually rendered. In the case of a lump sum or unit price contract, Contractor shall not be entitled to any further payment until the Construction Project has been completed. Upon completion of the Construction Project, if the unpaid balance of the Contractor’s compensation exceeds the cost to the City of completing the work, including all costs paid to any subcontractors or third parties retained by the City to complete the Construction Project and all administrative costs resulting from the termination (“City’s Cost for Completion”), such excess shall be Page 8 of 28 Version 12 14 15 paid to the Contractor. If the City’s Cost for Completion exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contractor’s compensation, then Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for and shall pay the difference, plus interest at the rate applicable to court judgments, to the City. c. Any termination provided for by this Section 12 shall be in addition to any other remedies to which the City may be entitled under the law or at equity. d. In the event of termination under this Section 12, Contractor shall, under no circumstances, be entitled to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature arising, or claimed to have arisen, as a result of the termination. 13. Termination for City’s Convenience: a. Should conditions arise which, in the sole opinion and discretion of the City, make it advisable to the City to cease work on the Construction Project, City may terminate this Agreement by written notice to Contractor (“Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience”). The termination shall be effective in the manner specified in the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience and shall be without prejudice to any claims that the City may otherwise have against Contractor. b. Upon receipt of the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience, unless otherwise directed in the Notice, the Contractor shall immediately cease work on the Construction Project, discontinue placing orders for materials, supplies, and equipment for the Construction Project, and make every reasonable effort to cancel all existing orders or contracts upon terms satisfactory to the City. Contractor shall do only such work as may be necessary to preserve, protect, and maintain work already completed, in progress, or in transit to the construction site. c. In the event of a termination pursuant to this Section 13, Contractor is entitled to payment only for those services Contractor actually rendered and materials actually purchased or which Contractor has made obligations to purchase on or before the receipt of the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience, and reasonably incurred costs for demobilization of Contractor’s and any subcontractor’s crews. It is agreed that any materials that City is obligated to purchase from Contractor will remain the City’s sole property. d. The compensation described in Section 13(c) is the sole compensation due to Contractor for its performance of this Agreement. Contractor shall, under no circumstances, be entitled to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature arising, or claimed to have arisen, as a result of the termination. 14. Limitation on Contractor’s Damages; Time for Asserting Claim: Page 9 of 28 Version 12 14 15 a. In the event of a claim for damages by Contractor under this Agreement, Contractor’s damages shall be limited to contract damages and Contractor hereby expressly waives any right to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature or kind. b. In the event Contractor wants to assert a claim for damages of any kind or nature, Contractor shall provide City with written notice of its claim, the facts and circumstances surrounding and giving rise to the claim, and the total amount of damages sought by the claim, within ten (10) days of the facts and circumstances giving rise to the claim. In the event Contractor fails to provide such notice, Contractor shall waive all rights to assert such claim. 15. Representatives: a. City’s Representative: The City’s Representative for the purpose of this Agreement shall be [insert name of representative (could be the consulting architect or engineer) or such other individual as City shall designate in writing. Whenever approval or authorization from or communication or submission to City is required by this Agreement, such communication or submission shall be directed to the City’s Representative and approvals or authorizations shall be issued only by such Representative; provided, however, that in exigent circumstances when City’s Representative is not available, Contractor may direct its communication or submission to other designated City personnel or agents and may receive approvals or authorization from such persons. b. Contractor’s Representative: The Contractor’s Representative for the purpose of this Agreement shall be _______________________________ or such other individual as Contractor shall designate in writing. Whenever direction to or communication with Contractor is required by this Agreement, such direction or communication shall be directed to Contractor’s Representative; provided, however, that in exigent circumstances when Contractor’s Representative is not available, City may direct its direction or communication to other designated Contractor personnel or agents. 16. Locating Underground Facilities: Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and determining the location of any underground facilities, including but not limited to, the location of any pipelines or utility supply, delivery, or service lines in accordance with the provisions of §69-4-501, et seq., MCA. Contractor shall make every effort to avoid damage to underground facilities and shall be solely responsible for any damage that may occur. If City personnel assume responsibility for locating any underground facilities, this fact shall be noted in writing prior to commencement of such location work. 17. Permits: Contractor shall provide all notices, comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, obtain all necessary permits, licenses, including a City of Bozeman business license, and inspections from applicable governmental authorities, pay all fees Page 10 of 28 Version 12 14 15 and charges in connection therewith, and perform all surveys and locations necessary for the timely completion of the Construction Project. 18. Ownership of Documents; Indemnification: All plans, designs, drawings, specifications, documents, sample results and data, in whatever medium or format, originated or prepared by or for Contractor in contemplation of, or in the course of, or as a result of this Agreement or work on the Construction Project, shall be promptly furnished to the City (“City Documents and Information”). All City Documents and Information shall be the exclusive property of the City and shall be deemed to be works-for-hire. Contractor hereby assigns all right, title, and interest in and to the City Documents and Information, including but not limited to, all copyright and patent rights in and to the City Documents and Information. Neither party grants to the other any express or implied licenses under any patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights, except to the extent necessary to complete its obligations to the other under this Agreement. 19. Laws and Regulations: Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable state and federal laws, regulations, and municipal ordinances including, but not limited to, all workers’ compensation laws, all environmental laws including, but not limited to, the generation and disposal of hazardous waste, the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), the safety rules, codes, and provisions of the Montana Safety Act in Title 50, Chapter 71, MCA, all applicable City, County, and State building and electrical codes, the Americans with Disabilities Act, and all non-discrimination, affirmative action, and utilization of minority and small business statutes and regulations. 20. Non-discrimination: The Contractor shall have a policy to provide equal employment opportunity in accordance with all applicable state and federal anti-discrimination laws, regulations, and contracts. The Contractor shall not refuse employment to a person, bar a person from employment, or discriminate against a person in compensation or in a term, condition, or privilege of employment because of race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, national origin, actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity, physical or mental disability, except when the reasonable demands of the position require an age, physical or mental disability, marital status or sex distinction. The Contractor shall be subject to and comply with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964; Section 140, Title 2, United States Code, and all regulations promulgated thereunder. The Contractor shall require these nondiscrimination terms of its sub-contractors providing services under this agreement. 21. Intoxicants; DOT Drug and Alcohol Regulations: Contractor shall not permit or suffer the introduction or use of any intoxicants, including alcohol or illegal drugs, upon the site of the Construction Project. Contractor acknowledges it is aware of and shall comply with its responsibilities and obligations under the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations governing anti-drug and alcohol misuse prevention plans and related testing. City shall have the right to request proof of such compliance and Contractor shall be obligated to furnish such proof. 22. Labor Relations: Page 11 of 28 Version 12 14 15 a. Contractor shall post a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the Contractor’s employees and the frequency of such payments (i.e., hourly wage employees shall be paid weekly). Such posting shall be made in a prominent and accessible location at the site of the Construction Project and shall be made no later than the first day of work. Such posting shall be removed only upon the final completion of the Construction Project and the termination of this Agreement. b. In performing the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the work on the Construction Project, Contractor shall give preference to the employment of bona fide residents of Montana, as required by §18-2-403, MCA, and as such, term is defined by §18-2-401(1), MCA. When making assignments of work, Contractor shall use workers both skilled in their trade and specialized in their field of work for all work to which they are assigned. c. Pursuant to §§18-2-403 and 18-2-422, MCA, Contractor shall pay wages, benefits, and expenses in conformance with the current version of the Prevailing Wage Rates for Building Construction Services as published by the Montana Department of Labor and Industry and which are applicable to Gallatin County. Contractor shall pay all hourly wage employees on a weekly basis. Violation of the requirements to pay applicable prevailing wage rates may subject the Contractor to the penalties set forth in §18-2-407, MCA. Contractor shall maintain payroll records and provide certified copies to the City. Contractor shall maintain such payroll records during the term of this Agreement, the course of the work on the Construction Project, and for a period of three (3) years following the date of final completion of the Construction Project and termination of this Agreement. d. In the event that, during the term of this Agreement and throughout the course of Contractor’s performance of the Construction Project, any labor problems or disputes of any type arise or materialize which in turn cause any work on the Construction Project to cease for any period of time, Contractor specifically agrees to take immediate steps, at its own expense and without expectation of reimbursement from City, to alleviate or resolve all such labor problems or disputes. The specific steps Contractor shall take to resume work on the Construction Project shall be left to the discretion of Contractor; provided, however, that Contractor shall bear all costs of any related legal action. Contractor shall provide immediate relief to the City so as to permit the work on the Construction Project to resume and be completed within the time frames set forth in the Construction Schedule at no additional cost to City. e. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold the City harmless from any and all claims, demands, costs, expenses, damages, and liabilities arising out of, resulting from, or occurring in connection with any labor problems or disputes or any delays or stoppages of work associated with such problems or disputes. 23. Subcontractors: Page 12 of 28 Version 12 14 15 a. Contractor may employ subcontractors for any work on the Construction Project. Contractor shall provide City with a list of all subcontractors employed. b. Contractor remains fully responsible for the acts and omissions of any subcontractor, just as Contractor is for its own acts and omissions, and Contractor shall remain fully responsible and liable for the timely completion of the Construction Project. c. Contractor is solely liable for any and all payments to subcontractors. Contractor shall hold all payments received from the City in trust for the benefit of subcontractors, and all such payments shall be used to satisfy obligations of the Construction Project before being used for any other purpose. Contractor shall make any payments due to any subcontractor within seven (7) days of Contractor’s receipt of payment, including a proportional part of the retainage Contractor has received from the City. In the event of a dispute regarding any subcontractor’s invoice, Contractor shall promptly pay the undisputed amount to the subcontractor and notify the subcontractor in writing of the amount in dispute and the reasons for the dispute. Any withholding of payment must comply with the requirements of §28-2-2103, MCA. In the event Contractor is unwilling or unable to make timely and proper payment to any subcontractor, City may elect to withhold any payment otherwise due to Contractor and upon seven (7) days’ written notice to Contractor, may pay subcontractor by direct or joint payment. 24. Indebtedness and Liens: Before City may make any final payment to Contractor, Contractor shall furnish City with satisfactory proof that there are no outstanding debts or liens in connection with the Construction Project. If the Contractor allows any indebtedness to accrue to subcontractors or others during the progress of the work, and fails to pay or discharge the same within five (5) days after demand, then City may either withhold any money due to Contractor until such indebtedness is paid or apply the same towards the discharge of the indebtedness. If any lien or claim is filed or made by any subcontractor, material supplier, or any other person, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City and shall cause the same to be discharged of record within thirty (30) days after its filing. 25. Hazard Communication: Contractor shall comply with all hazard communication requirements dictated by the Environmental Protection Agency, the Montana Department of Agriculture, OSHA, Hazard Communications Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, and applicable City ordinances. Contractor shall supply a chemical list, the associated material safety data sheets (MSDS), and other pertinent health exposure data for chemicals that the Contractor’s, subcontractor’s or the City’s employees may be exposed to while working on City property during the course of the Construction Project. One copy of this documentation must be delivered to City to the attention of the City’s Representative. This documentation must be delivered before work involving these chemicals may commence. 26. Accounts and Records: During the term of this Agreement and for two (2) years following the City’s final acceptance of the Construction Project, Contractor shall maintain accounts and records related to the Construction Project. Upon reasonable notice, City shall have the right to inspect all such accounts and records, including but not limited to, Contractor’s Page 13 of 28 Version 12 14 15 records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, specifications, field and site notes, receipts, invoices, bills, contracts, or other documents relating to the Construction Project. 27. Indemnification; Insurance; Bonds: a. Contractor agrees to release, defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the City, its agents, representatives, employees, and officers (collectively referred to for purposes of this Section as the City) from and against any and all claims, demands, actions, fees and costs (including attorney’s fees and the costs and fees of and expert witness and consultants), losses, expenses, liabilities (including liability where activity is inherently or intrinsically dangerous) or damages of whatever kind or nature connected therewith and without limit and without regard to the cause or causes thereof or the negligence of any party or parties that may be asserted against, recovered from or suffered by the City occasioned by, growing or arising out of or resulting from or in any way related to: (i) the negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of the Contractor; (ii) any negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of any of the Contractor’s agents; or (iii) the negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of any other third party. b. Such obligations shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist. The indemnification obligations of this Section must not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce any common-law or statutory rights of the indemnitee(s) which would otherwise exist as to such indemnitee(s). c. Contractor’s indemnity under this Section shall be without regard to and without any right to contribution from any insurance maintained by City. d. Should any indemnitee described herein be required to bring an action against the Contractor to assert its right to defense or indemnification under this Agreement or under the Contractor’s applicable insurance policies required below the indemnitee shall be entitled to recover reasonable costs and attorney fees incurred in asserting its right to indemnification or defense but only if a court of competent jurisdiction determines the Contractor was obligated to defend the claim(s) or was obligated to indemnify the indemnitee for a claim(s) or any portion(s) thereof. e. In the event of an action filed against City resulting from the City’s performance under this Agreement, the City may elect to represent itself and incur all costs and expenses of suit. f. Contractor also waives any and all claims and recourse against the City or its officers, agents or employees, including the right of contribution for loss or damage to person or property arising from, growing out of, or in any way connected with or incident to the performance of this Agreement except “responsibility for his own fraud, for willful injury to the person or property of another, or for violation of law, whether willful or negligent” as per 28-2-702, MCA. Page 14 of 28 Version 12 14 15 g. These obligations shall survive termination of this Agreement and the services performed hereunder. h. In addition to and independent from the above, Contractor shall at Contractor’s expense secure insurance coverage through an insurance company or companies duly licensed and authorized to conduct insurance business in Montana which insures the liabilities and obligations specifically assumed by the Contractor in this Section. The insurance coverage shall not contain any exclusion for liabilities specifically assumed by the Contractor in subsection (a) of this Section. The insurance shall cover and apply to all claims, demands, suits, damages, losses, and expenses that may be asserted or claimed against, recovered from, or suffered by the City without limit and without regard to the cause therefore and which is acceptable to the City and Contractor shall furnish to the City an accompanying certificate of insurance and accompanying endorsements in amounts not less than as shown on Exhibit __: The amounts of insurance provided shall be exclusive of defense costs. The City of Bozeman, its officers, agents, and employees, shall be endorsed as an additional or named insured on a primary non-contributory basis on both the Commercial General and Automobile Liability policies. The insurance and required endorsements must be in a form suitable to City and shall include no less than a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation or non-renewal. The City must approve all insurance coverage and endorsements prior to the Contractor commencing work. Contractor shall notify City within two (2) business days of Contractor’s receipt of notice that any required insurance coverage will be terminated or Contractor’s decision to terminate any required insurance coverage for any reason. The City must approve all insurance coverage and endorsements prior to the Contractor commencing work. 28. Taxes: Contractor is obligated to pay all taxes of any kind or nature and make all appropriate employee withholdings. Contractor understands that all contractors or subcontractors working on a publicly funded project are required to pay or have withheld from earnings a license fee of one percent (1%) of the gross contract price if the gross contract price is Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000) or more. This license fee is paid to the Montana Department of Revenue. 29. Dispute Resolution: a. Any claim, controversy, or dispute between the parties, their agents, employees, or representatives shall be resolved first by negotiation between senior-level personnel from each party duly authorized to execute settlement agreements. Upon mutual agreement of the parties, the parties may invite an independent, disinterested mediator to assist in the negotiated settlement discussions. b. If the parties are unable to resolve the dispute within thirty (30) days from the date the dispute was first raised, then such dispute shall be resolved in a court of Page 15 of 28 Version 12 14 15 competent jurisdiction in compliance with the Applicable Law provisions of this Agreement. 30. Survival: Contractor’s indemnification and warranty obligations shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement for the maximum period allowed under applicable law. 31. Headings: The headings used in this Agreement are for convenience only and are not be construed as a part of the Agreement or as a limitation on the scope of the particular paragraphs to which they refer. 32. Waiver: A waiver by City of any default or breach by Contractor of any covenants, terms, or conditions of this Agreement does not limit City’s right to enforce such covenants, terms, or conditions or to pursue City’s rights in the event of any subsequent default or breach. 33. Severability: If any portion of this Agreement is held to be void or unenforceable, the balance thereof shall continue in effect. 34. Applicable Law: The parties agree that this Agreement is governed in all respects by the laws of the State of Montana. 35. Binding Effect: This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of the heirs, legal representatives, successors, and assigns of the parties. 36. Amendments: This Agreement may not be modified, amended, or changed in any respect except by a written document signed by all parties. 37. No Third-Party Beneficiary: This Agreement is for the exclusive benefit of the parties, does not constitute a third-party beneficiary agreement, and may not be relied upon or enforced by a third party. 38. Counterparts: This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, which together constitute one instrument. 39. Assignment: Contractor may not assign this Agreement in whole or in part without the prior written consent of the City. No assignment will relieve Contractor of its responsibility for the performance of the Agreement and the completion of the Construction Project. Contractor may not assign to any third party other than Contractor’s subcontractors on the Construction Project, the right to receive monies due from City without the prior written consent of City. 40. Authority: Each party represents that it has full power and authority to enter into and perform this Agreement and the person signing this Agreement on behalf of each party has been properly authorized and empowered to sign this Agreement. Page 16 of 28 Version 12 14 15 41. Independent Contractor: The parties agree and acknowledge that in the performance of this Agreement and the completion of the Construction Project, Contractor shall render services as an independent contractor and not as the agent, representative, subcontractor, or employee of the City. The parties further agree that all individuals and companies retained by Contractor at all times will be considered the agents, employees, or independent contractors of Contractor and at no time will they be the employees, agents, or representatives of the City. 42. Agreement Documents: All work on the Construction Project shall be performed by Contractor in accordance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement and are incorporated herein by this reference: Exhibit A: Contractor’s submitted Bid Form Exhibit B: Construction Schedule Exhibit C: Compensation Schedule Exhibit D: Change of Work Specifications Exhibit E: Required Insurance Coverage Exhibit E: Required Bonds Exhibit F: Plans and Specifications 43. Integration: This Agreement and all Exhibits attached hereto constitute the entire agreement of the parties. Covenants or representations not contained therein or made a part thereof by reference, are not binding upon the parties. There are no understandings between the parties other than as set forth in this Agreement. All communications, either verbal or written, made prior to the date of this Agreement are hereby abrogated and withdrawn unless specifically made a part of this Agreement by reference. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Contractor and City have caused this Agreement to be executed, effective on the date written above, and intend to be legally bound thereby. CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA CONTRACTOR By: _______________________________ By: Chris A. Kukulski, City Manager Print Name: Title: APPROVED AS TO FORM (§18-2-406, MCA): By: _______________________________ Greg Sullivan, City Attorney Page 17 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Page 18 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit __ Page 19 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit __ Construction Schedule Page 20 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit ___ Compensation Schedule Contractor shall not demand or be entitled to receive payment for any work on the Construction Project, in whole or in part, except in the manner set forth herein. Monthly Progress Payments A. After the commencement of work on the Construction Project, the Contractor may request monthly progress payments by submitting an Application for Payment to the City’s Representative during each successive calendar month, with a copy to the project architect or engineer. The Application for Payment must be based upon the actual or estimated percentage of work completed and materials supplied on the Construction Project prior to the date of the Application and shall be filled out and signed by the Contractor on a form provided by the City. Contractor shall attach all supporting documentation to the Application, including certified payroll records and receipts, to verify that the work claimed in the Application has been completed. Only one Application for Payment may be submitted within a calendar month. B. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall also include an affidavit signed by the Contractor stating that all previous monthly progress payments received have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s obligations associated with the prior Applications for Payment. C. City and its architect or engineer shall promptly review all Applications for Payment and, within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of each Application, determine whether a progress payment should be disapproved in whole or in part. An Application for Payment is considered to have been received when it is submitted to City’s Representative and is considered approved unless prior to the expiration of the 21-day period the City or its architect or engineer provides the Contractor with a written statement containing specific items that are being disapproved. A progress payment or any portion may be disapproved upon a claim of: (1) unsatisfactory job progress; (2) failure to remedy defective construction work or materials; (3) disputed work or materials; (4) failure to comply with material provisions of this Agreement, drawings, plans, specifications for the Construction Project, or other required documents, including but not limited to, payroll certifications, insurance coverage, bonding, lien releases, warranties, material certifications, and test data; (5) failure of Contractor to make timely payment for claims including, but not limited to claims for labor, equipment, materials, subcontracts, taxes, fees, professional services, rent, and royalties; (6) damages to the City; (7) the existence of reasonable evidence that the Agreement cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Agreement’s Compensation; and (8) Contractor’s non-compliance with applicable federal, state, and local laws, rules, and ordinances. D. The City will furnish Contractor a written statement specifying a reason for disapproval that is listed in Section C above for which approval of the Application for Payment or a portion thereof is being withheld. If the City disapproves only a portion of an Application for Payment, the remainder of the Application for Payment is considered approved. Page 21 of 28 Version 12 14 15 E. If the City approves a monthly progress payment, the City shall withhold the five percent (5%) Retainage Amount from the total payment requested in the Application for Payment and may withhold an amount that is sufficient to pay the direct expenses that the City may reasonably expect will be necessary to correct any claim based on the eight (8) items set out in Section C above. City shall tender the balance of the approved monthly progress payment to Contractor within seven (7) days following the approval. F. Contractor understands that the Montana Public Contractors’ Gross Receipts Tax requires all contractors or subcontractors working on a publicly funded project to pay or have withheld from earnings one percent (1%) of the gross contract price if the public contract price, including subcontracts attached thereto, is Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000) or more. If required, the City will withhold this tax from any payment made to Contractor and will remit the amount withheld to the Montana Department of Revenue. Contractor must withhold the tax from payments made to subcontractors by Contractor. G. City’s approval of any progress payment shall not operate as City’s acceptance of any portion of the Construction Project as complete or free of defects or nonconformities, nor shall it operate as a waiver of Contractor’s obligations under the Agreement including, but not limited to, Contractor’s testing and warranty obligations. Final Payment A. Upon completion of the Construction Project, Contractor shall submit a final Application for Payment to the City’s Representative seeking payment of the remaining balance of Contractor’s compensation, including all retainage amounts. Contractor shall attach all supporting documentation and receipts to the final Application for Payment to verify that the Construction Project has been fully and finally completed in compliance with all terms and conditions of the Agreement, including complete and legally effective releases or waivers of all liens or encumbrances that have been filed against the Construction Project, and a consent from all of Contractor’s sureties to final payment. In addition, Contractor shall include an affidavit signed by the Contractor stating that all previous monthly progress payments received have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s obligations associated with the Construction Project and that the prior Applications for Payment and all claims asserted by any person arising from or related to the Construction Project have been settled or satisfied. In the event any claims have not been settled or satisfied, the Affidavit shall contain a complete listing of such claims, the name and address of each person making a claim, the facts and circumstances surrounding each claim, the amount of each claim, and the efforts made to date by Contractor to resolve, settle or satisfy each claim. B. City and its architect or engineer shall promptly review the final Application for Payment and, within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of the request, determine whether it should be disapproved in whole or in part. The final Application for Payment is considered to have been received when it is submitted to City’s Representative and is considered approved unless the City’s Representative provides the Contractor with a written statement containing specific items that are being disapproved prior to the expiration of the 21-day period. A final payment or any portion may be disapproved upon a claim of: (1) unsatisfactory job progress; (2) Page 22 of 28 Version 12 14 15 after City’s final inspection of the Construction Project, Contractor has not completed all punch list items and failed to remedy defective construction work or materials; (3) disputed work or materials; (4) failure to comply with material provisions of this Agreement, drawings, plans, specifications for the Construction Project, or other required documents including, but not limited to, payroll certifications, insurance coverage, bonding, lien releases, warranties, material certifications, and test data; (5) failure of Contractor to make timely payment for claims including, but not limited to, claims for labor, equipment, materials, subcontracts, taxes, fees, professional services, rent, and royalties; (6) claims have been brought or liens have been filed against Contractor or the City related to the Construction Project, or any such claims have not been properly documented in Contractor’s Affidavit; (7) damage to the City; (8) Contractor has not delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, marked-up record documents, and any other documents relating to the Construction Project as required by City; and (9) the Contractor is not in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local laws, rules, and ordinances and has not remedied the noncompliance. C. The City’s Representative will furnish Contractor a written statement specifying a reason for disapproval that is listed in Section B above for which approval of the final Application for Payment or a portion thereof is being withheld. If the City disapproves only a portion of an Application for Payment, the remainder of the Application for Payment is considered approved. D. Final payment is due and payable within fourteen (14) days of the City’s Representative’s approval, but City may withhold an amount that is sufficient to pay the direct expenses that the City may reasonably expect will be necessary to correct any claim based on the nine (9) items set out in Section B above and any tax withholding required by law. Page 23 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit ___ Change of Work Specifications A. City may, at any time or from time to time, order changes, additions, deletions, or revisions to the work on the Construction Project by submitting a written Change Order to Contractor on a form as provided for by the City. Upon receipt of any Change Order, Contractor shall comply with the terms of the changed work as reflected in the Change Order. B. City and Contractor shall negotiate in good faith for an agreement as to any increase or decrease in the Contractor’s compensation that results from any Change Order. The increased or decreased Contractor’s compensation shall be set forth in the Change Order and both the City and the Contractor shall sign the Change Order as an indication of their respective acceptance of the changes and modifications to the Agreement. In the event the City and Contractor are unable to agree upon the increase or decrease in Contractor’s compensation resulting from any Change Order, such increase or decrease shall be determined as follows: 1. increases to Contractor’s compensation shall be calculated as follows and shall be evidenced by Contractor’s submission to the City of its actual supporting documentation including time slips/cards, invoices, and receipts: a. by unit prices otherwise set forth in the Agreement or subsequently agreed upon; b. by an agreed upon lump sum; or c. by the cost of the work and an agreed upon mark-up for Contractor’s overhead and profit, with the costs of the work determined as follows: (i) Contractor’s actual, direct payroll expenses for the cost of labor. Payroll expenses shall only include actual gross wages paid, without any deductions, withholding, or overhead. The agreed upon mark-up fee shall cover Contractor’s liability insurance, workers’ compensation, and Social Security taxes applicable to said wages, Contractor’s reasonable profit, the costs for the use of small tools and equipment not otherwise classified under heavy equipment use, and Contractor’s general overhead expenses. (ii) Contractor’s actual cost of materials, including actual transportation costs, for all materials supplied by Contractor. (iii) Costs for the use of heavy equipment and the transportation of the same. Such costs shall be the actual rental fees incurred for the use of the heavy equipment and the actual costs of transporting such heavy equipment to and from the site of the Construction Project. Page 24 of 28 Version 12 14 15 2. decreases to Contractor’s compensation shall be determined by the City’s good faith estimate. If Contractor disagrees with such good faith estimate, Contractor can avail itself of the Dispute Resolution provisions set forth in the Agreement. C. Except for minor modifications in the work not involving an increase of costs or Contractor’s compensation and not inconsistent with the purposes of the work required by the Agreement, and except in an emergency situation which endangers life or property, no change to the work requirements shall be made unless pursuant to a written Change Order duly executed. D. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contractor’s compensation or the extension of any deadlines set forth in Construction Schedule with respect to any work performed by Contractor that is not required by the terms and conditions of the Agreement and is not contained in a duly executed Change Order. Page 25 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit ___ Required Insurance Coverage Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance coverage as set forth below. The insurance policy must protect, defend, and indemnify the City, its employees, officers, and agents and must endorse the City, its employees, officers and agents as an additional insureds and be written on a “primary—noncontributory basis.” Each coverage shall be obtained from an insurance company that is duly licensed and authorized to transact insurance business and write insurance within the state of Montana, with a minimum of “A.M. Best Rating” of A-, VI, as will protect the Contractor, the various acts of subcontractors, the City and its officers, employees, agents, and representatives from claims for bodily injury and/or property damage which may arise from operations and completed operations under this Agreement. All insurance coverage shall remain in effect throughout the life of this Agreement and for a minimum of one (1) year following the date of expiration of Contractor’s warranties. All insurance policies must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least forty-five (45) days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, City, and all other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. Required Insurance Coverage: 1. Commercial General Liability $1,500,000 per occurrence (bodily injury and property damage) $3,000,000 aggregate 2. Products and Completed Operations $3,000,000 3. Automobile Liability $1,500,000 per accident (all owned, hired, non-owned) 4. Workers’ Compensation Not less than statutory limits 5. Employers’ Liability $1,500,000 6. Professional Liability (E&O) $1,500,000 (only if applicable) 7. Builder’s Risk/Property Insurance (for buildings) Equal to greater of Contractor’s compensation or full replacement (covering all work. buildings, materials and equipment, whether on site or in transit, loss due to fire, lightening, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of laws, water damage, flood if site within a flood plain, repair or replacement costs, testing and start-up costs) 8. Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability $1,000,000 per occurrence $3,000,000 aggregate 9. Contractual Liability Insurance $1,000,000 per occurrence (covering indemnity obligations) $3,000,000 aggregate Page 26 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Additional coverage may be required in the event of the following: crane operating services: add On-Hook Coverage transportation services: add $1,000,000 Transit Coverage Page 27 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit ___ Required Bonds Contractor shall make, execute, purchase, maintain and deliver to City performance and payment bonds in an amount at least equal to the Contractor’s compensation under this Agreement, conditioned that the Contractor shall faithfully perform of all of Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement and pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, material suppliers and all persons who supply the Contractor or Contractor’s subcontractors with provisions, provender, material, or supplies for performing work on the Construction Project. All bonds must be obtained with a surety company that is duly licensed and authorized to transact business within the state of Montana and to issue bonds for the limits so required. The surety company must have a Best’s Financial Strength Rating of A, as rated by the A. M. Best Co., or an equivalent rating from a similar rating service. All bonds must remain in effect throughout the life of this Agreement and for a minimum of one (1) year following the date of expiration of Contractor’s warranties. A certified copy of the agent’s authority to act must accompany all bonds signed by an agent. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business within the state of Montana is terminated, Contractor shall promptly notify City and shall within twenty (20) days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond with another surety company, both of which shall comply with all requirements set forth herein. Bond Types and Amounts: 1. Performance Bond Equal to Contractor’s compensation amount 2. Labor and Materials Bond Equal to Contractor’s compensation amount Page 28 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Exhibit ____ Drawings, Plans and Specifications The Drawings, Plans and Specifications provided by the City or its architect or engineer as described below: DRAWINGS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PRODUCED BY THINKONE AND DATED JANUARY 10, 2016. Revised 9/2/11 1 PERFORMANCE BOND (Insert full legal name and address of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, and: (Insert full legal name and address of Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto: City of Bozeman, Montana 121 North Rouse Ave. PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 as Obligee, hereinafter called CITY, in the amount of: (Dollars) ($ ) for the payment, whereof CONTRACTOR and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has, by written agreement dated 20___, entered into a contract with CITY for: (Insert project name) in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: (Insert company name) which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if CONTRACTOR shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. As a minimum, this obligation shall remain in full force and effect beyond the completion of all work to include the correction period as specified in the Contract Documents. The SURETY hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by CITY. Revised 9/2/11 2 Whenever CONTRACTOR shall be, and declared by CITY to be, in default under the Agreement, CITY having performed CITY’s obligations thereunder, the SURETY may promptly remedy the default or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Agreement in accordance with its terms and conditions; or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Agreement in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by SURETY of the lowest responsible bidder, or, if CITY elects, upon determination by CITY and the SURETY jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and CITY, and make available as work progresses (even though there should be a default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which SURETY may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term “balance of the contract price,” as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by CITY to CONTRACTOR under the Agreement and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by CITY to CONTRACTOR. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than CITY named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators, or successors of CITY. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in ( ) counterparts, each one (number) of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , 20___. CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL: SURETY: (Seal) Company Name Surety Name and Corporate Seal By: (Seal) By: Signature Signature Attorney-in-Fact Printed Name Printed Name (Attach Power of Attorney) Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is a partnership, all partners must execute Bond. Version 12 16 15 Page 1 of 3 PAYMENT BOND (Insert full legal name and address of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, and: (Insert full legal name and address of Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto: City of Bozeman, Montana 121 North Rouse Ave. PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 as Obligee, hereinafter called CITY, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined in the amount of: (Dollars) ($ ) for the payment, whereof CONTRACTOR and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has, by written agreement dated 20___, entered into a contract with CITY for: (Insert project name) in accordance with drawings and specification prepared by: (Insert company name) which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if CONTRACTOR shall promptly make payments to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and materials used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Agreement, and any duly authorized modifications that may hereafter be made, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: Version 12 16 15 Page 2 of 3 1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with a subcontractor of CONTRACTOR as defined by Title 18, Chapter 2, Part 2, MCA, for labor, materials, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Agreement; labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the Agreement. 2. The above named CONTRACTOR and SURETY hereby jointly and severally agree with CITY that every claimant as herein defined who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant’s work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this Bond for the use of such claimant in the name of CITY, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon, provided, however, that CITY shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. 3. A claimant may only commence a suit or action: a. If the claimant has complied with applicable state laws; and b. In District Court located in and for Gallatin County, Montana, in Bozeman Municipal Court, if applicable, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated and not elsewhere. 4. Special exceptions: 5. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payments by SURETY of construction liens which may be filed on record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this Bond. Version 12 16 15 Page 3 of 3 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in ( ) counterparts, each one (number) of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , 20___. CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL: SURETY: (Seal) Company Name Surety Name and Corporate Seal By: (Seal) By: Signature Signature Attorney-in-Fact Printed Name Printed Name (Attach Power of Attorney) Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is a partnership, all partners must execute Bond. (BLANK PAGE) MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 2015 Effective: January 2, 2015 Steve Bullock, Governor State of Montana Pam Bucy, Commissioner Department of Labor and Industry To obtain copies of prevailing wage rate schedules, or for information relating to public works projects and payment of prevailing wage rates, visit ERD at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or contact: Employment Relations Division Montana Department of Labor and Industry P. O. Box 201503 Helena, MT 59620-1503 Phone 406-444-5600 TDD 406-444-5549 The Labor Standards Bureau welcomes questions, comments and suggestions from the public. In addition, we’ll do our best to provide information in an accessible format, upon request, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act. MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The Commissioner of the Department of Labor and Industry, in accordance with Sections 18-2-401 and 18-2-402 of the Montana Code Annotated (MCA), has determined the standard prevailing rate of wages for the occupations listed in this publication. The wages specified herein control the prevailing rate of wages for the purposes of 18-2-401, et seq., MCA. It is required that each employer pay (as a minimum) the rate of wages, including fringe benefits, travel allowance, zone pay and per diem applicable to the district in which the work is being performed as provided in the attached wage determinations. All Montana Prevailing Wage Rates are available on the internet at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or by contacting the Labor Standards Bureau at (406) 444-5600 or TDD (406) 444-5549. In addition, this publication provides general information concerning compliance with Montana’s Prevailing Wage Law and the payment of prevailing wages. For detailed compliance information relating to public works contracts and payment of prevailing wage rates, please consult the regulations on the internet at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or contact the Labor Standards Bureau at (406) 444-5600 or TDD (406) 444-5549. PAM BUCY Commissioner Department of Labor and Industry State of Montana 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS: WAGE RATES: A. Date of Publication ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 B. Definition of Building Construction ……………………………………………………………………………………….......... 3 C. Definition of Public Works Contract ………………………………………………………………………………………….... 3 D. Prevailing Wage Schedule ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3 E. Rates to Use for Projects ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3 F. Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts ……………………………………………………………………………… 3 G. Fringe Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4 H. Prevailing Wage Districts ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4 I. Dispatch City ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 J. Zone Pay ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 K. Computing Travel Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5 L. Per Diem ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 M. Apprentices ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 N. Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 O. Employment Preference ……………………………………………………………………………………………………....... 5 P. Building Construction Occupations Website …………………………………………………………………………………… 5 Q. Welder Rates ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 R. Foreman Rates …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 BOILERMAKERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS ………………………………………………………………………………………........ 6 CARPENTERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 CEMENT MASONS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OPERATORS GROUP 1 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………..... 7 OPERATORS GROUP 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 OPERATORS GROUP 3 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 5 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 OPERATORS GROUP 6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 OPERATORS GROUP 7 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS LABORERS GROUP 1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 LABORERS GROUP 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10 LABORERS GROUP 3 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10 LABORERS GROUP 4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 11 DRYWALL APPLICATORS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 11 ELECTRICIANS: INCLUDING BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL …………………………………………………………… 12 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12 FLOOR LAYERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12 GLAZIERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13 INSULATION WORKERS-MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) ………………………………………………………………... 13 IRONWORKERS-STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR PLACERS ………………………………………………………………. 14 MILLWRIGHTS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 14 PAINTERS: INCLUDING PAPERHANGER ………………………………………………………………………………………… 14 PILE BUCKS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 14 PLASTERERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 15 PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS ……………………………………………………………………………….. 15 ROOFERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 16 SHEET METAL WORKERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 16 SPRINKLER FITTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 16 TAPERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 16 TEAMSTERS GROUP 2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 17 TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS …………………………………………………………………………… 17 TILE AND MARBLE SETTERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 17 3 A. Date of Publication The rate schedule was published with the Secretary of State on December 24, 2014. It is for use in bid solicitations first made on or after January 2, 2015. B. Definition of Building Construction For the purposes of Prevailing Wage, the Commissioner of Labor and Industry has determined that building construction occupations are defined to be those performed by a person engaged in a recognized trade or craft, or any skilled, semi- skilled, or unskilled manual labor related to the construction, alteration, or repair of a public building or facility, and does not include engineering, superintendence, management, office or clerical work. The Administrative Rules of Montana (ARM) 24.17.501(2) – 2(a), Public Works Contracts for Construction Services Subject to Prevailing Wage Rates, states: “Building construction projects generally are the constructions of sheltered enclosures with walk-in access for housing persons, machinery, equipment, or supplies. It includes all construction of such structures, incidental installation of utilities and equipment, both above and below grade level, as well as incidental grading, utilities and paving. Examples of building construction include, but are not limited to, alterations and additions to buildings, apartment buildings (5 stories and above), arenas (closed), auditoriums, automobile parking garages, banks and financial buildings, barracks, churches, city halls, civic centers, commercial buildings, court houses, detention facilities, dormitories, farm buildings, fire stations, hospitals, hotels, industrial buildings, institutional buildings, libraries, mausoleums, motels, museums, nursing and convalescent facilities, office buildings, out-patient clinics, passenger and freight terminal buildings, police stations, post offices, power plants, prefabricated buildings, remodeling buildings, renovating buildings, repairing buildings, restaurants, schools, service stations, shopping centers, stores, subway stations, theaters, warehouses, water and sewage treatment plants (buildings only), etc.” C. Definition of Public Works Contract Section 18-2-401(11)(a), MCA defines “public works contract” as “…a contract for construction services let by the state, county, municipality, school district, or political subdivision or for nonconstruction services let by the state, county, municipality, or political subdivision in which the total cost of the contract is in excess of $25,000…” D. Prevailing Wage Schedule This publication covers only Building Construction occupations and rates. These rates will remain in effect until superseded by a more current publication. Current prevailing wage rate schedules for Heavy Construction, Highway Construction, and Nonconstruction Services occupations can be found on the internet at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or by contacting the Labor Standards Bureau at (406) 444-5600 or TDD (406) 444-5549. E. Rates to Use for Projects Rates to be used on a public works project are those that are in effect at the time the project and bid specifications are advertised. F. Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts Section 18-2-417, MCA states: “(1) Any public works contract that by the terms of the original contract calls for more than 30 months to fully perform must include a provision to adjust, as provided in subsection (2), the standard prevailing rate of wages to be paid to the workers performing the contract. (2) The standard prevailing rate of wages paid to workers under a contract subject to this section must be adjusted 12 months after the date of the award of the public works contract. The amount of the adjustment must be a 3% increase. The adjustment must be made and applied every 12 months for the term of the contract. (3) Any increase in the standard rate of prevailing wages for workers under this section is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any subcontractors and not the contracting agency.” 4 G. Fringe Benefits Section 18-2-412, MCA states: “(1) To fulfill the obligation...a contractor or subcontractor may: (a) pay the amount of fringe benefits and the basic hourly rate of pay that is part of the standard prevailing rate of wages directly to the worker or employee in cash; (b) make an irrevocable contribution to a trustee or a third person pursuant to a fringe benefit fund, plan, or program that meets the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that is a bona fide program approved by the U. S. department of labor; or (c) make payments using any combination of methods set forth in subsections (1)(a) and (1)(b) so that the aggregate of payments and contributions is not less than the standard prevailing rate of wages, including fringe benefits and travel allowances, applicable to the district for the particular type of work being performed. (2) The fringe benefit fund, plan, or program described in subsection (1)(b) must provide benefits to workers or employees for health care, pensions on retirement or death, life insurance, disability and sickness insurance, or bona fide programs that meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that are approved by the U. S. department of labor.” Fringe benefits are paid for all hours worked (straight time and overtime hours). However, fringe benefits are not to be considered a part of the hourly rate of pay for calculating overtime, unless there is a collectively bargained agreement in effect that specifies otherwise. H. Prevailing Wage Districts Montana counties are aggregated into 4 districts for the purpose of prevailing wage. The prevailing wage districts are composed of the following counties: 5 I. Dispatch City Dispatch City is the courthouse in the city from the following list which is closest to the center of the job: Billings, Bozeman, Butte, Great Falls, Helena, Kalispell, and Missoula. J. Zone Pay Zone pay is not travel pay. It is an amount added to the base pay, the combined sum then becomes the new base wage rate to be paid for all hours worked on the project. Zone pay shall be determined by measuring the road miles one direction over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city to the center of the job. K. Computing Travel Benefits Travel pay, also referred to as travel allowance, shall be paid for travel both to and from the job site, except those with special provisions listed under the classification. The rate is determined by measuring the road miles one direction over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city or the employee's home, whichever is closer, to the center of the job. L. Per Diem Per Diem typically covers the costs associated with board and lodging expenses. Per diem is paid when an employee is required to work at a location outside the daily commuting distance and is required to stay overnight or longer. M. Apprentices Wage rates for apprentices registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs are contained in those programs. Additionally, section 18-2-416(2), MCA states, “…The full amount of any applicable fringe benefits must be paid to the apprentice while the apprentice is working on the public works contract.” Apprentices not registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs will be paid the appropriate journey level prevailing wage rate when working on a public works contract. N. Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages Section 18-2-406, MCA provides that contractors, subcontractors and employers who are “…performing work or providing construction services under public works contracts, as provided in this part, shall post in a prominent and accessible site on the project or staging area, not later than the first day of work and continuing for the entire duration of the project, a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the employees.” O. Employment Preference Sections 18-2-403 and 18-2-409, MCA requires contractors to give preference to the employment of bona fide Montana residents in the performance of work on public works contracts. P. Building Construction Occupations Website You can find definitions for these occupations on the following Bureau of Labor Statistics website: http://www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_stru.htm Q. Welder Rates Welders receive the rate prescribed for the craft performing an operation to which welding is incidental. R. Foreman Rates Rates are no longer set for foremen. However, if a foreman performs journey level work, the foreman must be paid at least the journey level rate. 6 WAGE RATES BOILERMAKERS Wage Benefit District 1 $30.72 $29.45 District 2 $30.00 $29.45 District 3 $30.00 $29.45 District 4 $30.00 $29.45 Travel: All Districts 0-120 mi. free zone >120 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. in effect when travel occurs. Special Provision: Travel is paid only at the beginning and end of the job. Per Diem: All Districts 0-70 mi. free zone >70-120 mi. $55.00/day >120 mi. $70.00/day BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS Wage Benefit District 1 $25.74 $12.47 District 2 $25.74 $12.47 District 3 $25.82 $12.47 District 4 $25.10 $12.25 Travel: All Districts 0-45 mi. free zone >45-60 mi. $25.00/day >60-90 mi. $55.00/day >90 mi. $65.00/day CARPENTERS Wage Benefit District 1 $21.50 $11.57 District 2 $21.50 $11.86 District 3 $21.50 $11.57 District 4 $21.50 $11.57 Duties Include: Install roll and batt insulation. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-50 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. CEMENT MASONS Wage Benefit District 1 $18.92 $9.26 District 2 $21.43 $9.41 District 3 $19.52 $9.26 District 4 $22.12 $9.26 Duties Include: Smooth and finish surfaces of poured concrete, such as floors, walks, sidewalks, or curbs. Align forms for sidewalks, curbs, or gutters. Zone Pay: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $1.05/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. Districts 2 - 4 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $2.95/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $4.75/hr. 7 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 1 Wage Benefit District 1 $24.07 $11.40 District 2 $24.07 $11.40 District 3 $24.07 $11.40 District 4 $24.07 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Air Compressor; Auto Fine Grader; Belt Finishing; Boring Machine (Small); Cement Silo; Crane, A-Frame Truck Crane; Crusher Conveyor; DW-10, 15, and 20 Tractor Roller; Farm Tractor; Forklift; Form Grader; Front-End Loader, under 1 cu. yd; Oiler, Heavy Duty Drills; Herman Nelson Heater; Mucking Machine; Oiler, All Except Cranes/Shovels; Pumpman. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit District 1 $25.54 $11.40 District 2 $25.54 $11.40 District 3 $25.54 $11.40 District 4 $25.54 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Air Doctor; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, up to and incl. 3 cu. yds; Bit Grinder; Bitunimous Paving Travel Plant; Boring Machine, Large; Broom, Self-Propelled; Concrete Travel Batcher; Concrete Float & Spreader; Concrete Bucket Dispatcher; Concrete Finish Machine; Concrete Conveyor; Distributor; Dozer, Rubber-Tired, Push, & Side Boom; Elevating Grader\Gradall; Field Equipment Serviceman; Front-End Loader, 1 cu. yd up to and incl. 5 cu. yds; Grade Setter; Heavy Duty Drills, All Types; Hoist\Tugger, All; Hydralift Forklifts & Similar; Industrial Locomotive; Motor Patrol (except finish); Mountain Skidder; Oiler, Cranes\Shovels; Pavement Breaker, EMSCO; Power Saw, Self-Propelled; Pugmill; Pumpcrete\Grout Machine; Punch Truck; Roller, other than Asphalt; Roller, Sheepsfoot (Self-Propelled); Roller, 25 tons and over; Ross Carrier; Rotomill, under 6 ft; Trenching Machine; Washing /Screening Plant. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. 8 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit District 1 $25.95 $11.40 District 2 $25.95 $11.40 District 3 $25.95 $11.40 District 4 $25.95 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt Paving Machine; Asphalt Screed; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, over 3 cu. yds; Cableway Highline; Concrete Batch Plant; Concrete Curing Machine; Concrete Pump; Cranes, Creter; Cranes, Electric Overhead; Cranes, 24 tons and under; Curb Machine\Slip Form Paver; Finish Dozer; Front-End Loader, over 5 cu. yds; Mechanic\Welder; Pioneer Dozer; Roller Asphalt (Breakdown & Finish); Rotomill, over 6 ft; Scraper, Single, Twin, or Pulling Belly-Dump; YO-YO Cat. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 4 Wage Benefit District 1 $26.95 $11.40 District 2 $26.95 $11.40 District 3 $26.95 $11.40 District 4 $26.95 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt\Hot Plant Operator; Cranes, 25 tons up to and incl. 44 tons; Crusher Operator; Finish Motor Patrol; Finish Scraper. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 5 Wage Benefit District 1 $27.95 $11.40 District 2 $27.95 $11.40 District 3 $27.95 $11.40 District 4 $27.95 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 45 tons up to and incl. 74 tons. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. 9 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 6 Wage Benefit District 1 $28.95 $11.40 District 2 $28.95 $11.40 District 3 $28.95 $11.40 District 4 $28.95 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 75 tons up to and incl. 149 tons; Cranes, Whirley (All). Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 7 Wage Benefit District 1 $29.95 $11.40 District 2 $29.95 $11.40 District 3 $29.95 $11.40 District 4 $29.95 $11.40 This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 150 tons up to and incl. 250 tons; Cranes, over 250 tons—add $1.00 for every 100 tons over 250 tons; Crane, Tower (All); Crane Stiff-Leg or Derrick; Helicopter Hoist. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 1/FLAG PERSON FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL Wage Benefit District 1 $19.08 $9.10 District 2 $16.66 $8.65 District 3 $18.00 $7.90 District 4 $18.00 $7.17 Zone Pay: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $2.00/hr. District 2 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.75/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $2.25/hr. Districts 3 & 4 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. 10 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit District 1 $18.82 $8.38 District 2 $18.86 $6.53 District 3 $16.78 $4.40 District 4 $18.12 $4.65 This group includes but is not limited to: General Labor; Asbestos Removal; Burning Bar; Bucket Man; Carpenter Tender; Caisson Worker; Cement Mason Tender; Cement Handler (dry); Chuck Tender; Choker Setter; Concrete Worker; Curb Machine-lay Down; Crusher and Batch Worker; Heater Tender; Fence Erector; Landscape Laborer; Landscaper; Lawn Sprinkler Installer; Pipe Wrapper; Pot Tender; Powderman Tender; Rail and Truck Loaders and Unloaders; Riprapper; Sign Erection; Guardrail and Jersey Rail; Spike Driver; Stake Jumper; Signalman; Tail Hoseman; Tool Checker and Houseman and Traffic Control Worker. Zone Pay: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $2.00/hr. District 2 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $1.55/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $3.10/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $4.65/hr. Districts 3 & 4 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit District 1 $19.48 $9.10 District 2 $19.58 $8.65 District 3 $19.00 $7.90 District 4 $19.00 $7.17 This group includes but is not limited to: Concrete Vibrator; Dumpman (Grademan); Equipment Handler; Geotextile and Liners; High-Pressure Nozzleman; Jackhammer (Pavement Breaker) Non-Riding Rollers; Pipelayer; Posthole Digger (Power); Power Driven Wheelbarrow; Rigger; Sandblaster; Sod Cutter-Power and Tamper. Zone Pay: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $2.00/hr. District 2 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.75/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $2.25/hr. Districts 3 & 4 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. 11 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 4 Wage Benefit District 1 $18.74 $9.10 District 2 $19.81 $7.01 District 3 $20.55 $6.78 District 4 $18.55 $6.97 This group includes but is not limited to: Hod Carrier***; Water Well Laborer; Blaster; Wagon Driller; Asphalt Raker; Cutting Torch; Grade Setter; High-Scaler; Power Saws (Faller & Concrete) Powderman; Rock & Core Drill; Track or Truck Mounted Wagon Drill and Welder incl. Air Arc. ***Hod Carriers will receive the same amount of travel and/or subsistence pay as bricklayers when requested to travel. Zone Pay: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $2.00/hr. District 2 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $1.55/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $3.10/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $4.65/hr. District 3 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $2.95/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $4.70/hr. District 4 0-15 mi. free zone >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. DRYWALL APPLICATORS Wage Benefit District 1 $23.81 $11.57 District 2 $21.50 $11.86 District 3 $21.50 $11.57 District 4 $21.50 $11.57 Duties Include: Drywall and ceiling tile installation. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-50 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. 12 ELECTRICIANS: INCLUDING BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL Wage Benefit District 1 $26.85 $10.69 District 2 $29.06 $13.13 District 3 $27.58 $ 9.92 District 4 $30.73 $12.37 Duties Include: Electrical wiring; equipment and fixtures; street lights; electrical control systems. Installation and/or adjusting of building automation controls also during testing and balancing, commissioning and retro-commissioning. Travel: District 1 0-10 mi. free zone >10-45 mi. $0.585/mi. in excess of the free zone. >45 mi. $65.00/day District 2 0-08 mi. free zone >08-50 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. in effect when travel occurs, in excess of the free zone. >50 mi. $62.50/day District 3 0-08 mi. free zone >08-50 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. in effect when travel occurs, in excess of the free zone. >50 mi. $62.50/day District 4 0-18 mi. free zone >18-60 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. in effect when travel occurs and employee uses own vehicle. > 60 mi. $75.00/day in lieu of any other travel allowance. Per Diem: District 3 $65.00/day $75.00/day ( In Big Sky) ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS Wage Benefit District 1 $47.76 $32.38 District 2 $47.76 $32.38 District 3 $47.76 $32.38 District 4 $47.76 $32.38 Travel: All Districts 0-15 mi. free zone >15-25 mi. $38.28/day >25-35 mi. $76.56/day >35 mi. $72.55/day or cost of receipts for hotel and meals, whichever is greater. FLOOR LAYERS Wage Benefit District 1 $19.00 No Rate Established District 2 $19.00 No Rate Established District 3 $19.00 No Rate Established District 4 $19.00 No Rate Established Travel: All Districts 0-120 mi. free zone >120 mi. $45.00/day 13 GLAZIERS Wage Benefit District 1 $18.28 $2.30 District 2 $17.97 $1.00 District 3 $19.69 $4.52 District 4 $20.43 $6.31 Per Diem: District 1 Motel + $24.00/day Districts 2 $35.00/day District 3 All meals rooms and gas paid for by employer District 4 $100/day HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Wage Benefit District 1 $25.37 $12.63 District 2 $24.24 $14.44 District 3 $24.61 $14.44 District 4 $27.33 $14.44 Duties Include: Testing and balancing, commissioning and retro-commissioning of all air-handling equipment and duct work. Travel: All Districts 0-51 mi. free zone >51mi. $0.25/mi. in employer vehicle $0.65/mi. in employee vehicle Per Diem: All Districts $60.00/day INSULATION WORKERS-MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) Wage Benefit District 1 $32.32 $17.57 District 2 $32.32 $17.57 District 3 $32.32 $17.57 District 4 $32.32 $17.57 Duties Include: Insulate pipes, ductwork or other mechanical systems. Travel: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-40 mi. $20.00/day >40-50 mi. $30.00/day >50-60 mi. $40.00/day >60 mi. $45.00/day + $0.56/mi. if transportation is not provided / $0.20/mi. if in company vehicle. >60 mi. $77.00/day on jobs requiring an overnight stay + $0.56/mi. if transportation is not provided / $0.20/mi. if in company vehicle. 14 IRONWORKERS-STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR PLACERS Wage Benefit District 1 $25.90 $20.73 District 2 $26.50 $19.03 District 3 $26.50 $18.84 District 4 $26.50 $19.03 Duties Include: Structural steel erection; assemble prefabricated metal buildings; cut, bend, tie, and place rebar; energy producing windmill type towers; metal bleacher seating; handrail fabrication and ornamental steel. Travel: District 1 0-45 mi. free zone >45-60 mi. $30.00/day >60-100 mi. $55.00/day >100 mi. $75.00/day Districts 2 - 4 0-45 mi. free zone >45-85 mi. $45.00/day >85 mi. $75.00/day MILLWRIGHTS Wage Benefit District 1 $30.00 $11.57 District 2 $30.00 $11.57 District 3 $30.00 $11.57 District 4 $30.00 $11.57 Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-50 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. PAINTERS: INCLUDING PAPERHANGER Wage Benefit District 1 $19.63 $6.98 District 2 $24.00 $4.65 District 3 $18.73 $5.52 District 4 $14.43 $7.50 Travel: All Districts 0-120 mi. free zone >120 mi. $45.00/day PILE BUCKS Wage Benefit District 1 $27.00 $11.57 District 2 $27.00 $11.57 District 3 $27.00 $11.57 District 4 $27.00 $11.57 Duties Include: Set up crane; set up hammer; weld tips on piles; set leads; insure piles are driven straight with the use of level or plum bob. Give direction to crane operator as to speed and direction of swing. Cut piles to grade. Zone Pay: All Districts 0-30 mi. free zone >30-50 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. 15 PLASTERERS Wage Benefit District 1 $18.92 $9.26 District 2 $21.43 $9.41 District 3 $19.52 $9.26 District 4 $22.12 $9.26 Zone Pay: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $1.05/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $1.50/hr. Districts 2 - 4 0-30 mi. free zone >30-60 mi. base pay + $2.95/hr. >60 mi. base pay + $4.75/hr. PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS Wage Benefit District 1 $26.95 $13.21 District 2 $28.17 $12.88 District 3 $28.17 $12.88 District 4 $29.86 $15.11 Duties Include: Assemble, install, alter, and repair pipe-lines or pipe systems that carry water, steam, air, other liquids or gases. Testing of piping systems, commissioning and retro-commissioning. Workers in this occupation may also install heating and cooling equipment and mechanical control systems. Travel: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-50 mi. $20.00/day >50-75 mi. $35.00/day >75 mi. $70.00/day Special Provision: If transportation is not provided, an additional $0.35/mi. is added to the amounts above for travel at the beginning and end of job, not for every mile traveled. Districts 2 & 3 0-40 mi. free zone >40-80 mi. $30.00/day >80 mi. $60.00/day If employer provides transportation, travel pay will be ½ of the amounts listed above unless the employee stays overnight. If the employee chooses to stay overnight, the employee will receive the full amount of travel listed above even if the employer furnishes transportation. District 4 0-70 mi. free zone >70 mi. $0.55/mi. if transportation is not provided. Special Provision: If employee travels back and forth from home to job site, the employee will receive compensation for no more than two trips. Per Diem: District 4 $90.00/day 16 ROOFERS Wage Benefit District 1 $16.99 $9.97 District 2 $17.65 $4.69 District 3 $17.27 $3.90 District 4 $18.02 $4.15 Travel: District 1 0-50 mi. free zone >50 mi. $0.30/mi. Special Provision: Travel is paid only one way. Districts 2 - 4 0-30 mi. free zone >30 mi. $0.25/mi. when using employees vehicle. Per Diem: Districts 2 - 4 $55.00/day or actual expenses (verified with receipts) for board and room provided. SHEET METAL WORKERS Wage Benefit District 1 $25.37 $12.63 District 2 $24.24 $14.44 District 3 $24.61 $14.44 District 4 $27.33 $14.44 Duties Include: Testing and balancing, commissioning and retro-commissioning of all air-handling equipment and duct work. Travel: All Districts 0-51 mi. free zone >51mi. $0.25/mi. in employer vehicle $0.65/mi. in employee vehicle Per Diem: All Districts $60.00/day SPRINKLER FITTERS Wage Benefit District 1 $30.74 $18.22 District 2 $30.74 $18.22 District 3 $30.74 $18.22 District 4 $28.87 $10.52 Travel: All Districts 0-60 mi. free zone >60-80 mi. $16.50/day >80-100 mi. $26.50/day >100 mi. $80.00/day TAPERS Wage Benefit District 1 $20.07 $7.50 District 2 $23.14 $7.50 District 3 $23.14 $7.50 District 4 $23.14 $7.50 Travel: All Districts 0-120 mi. free zone >120 mi. $45.00/day 17 TEAMSTERS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit $26.06 $9.16 This group includes but is not limited to: Combination Truck and Concrete Mixer and Transit Mixer; Dry Batch Trucks; Distributor Driver; Dumpman; Dump Trucks and similar equipment; Dumpster; Flat Trucks; Lumber Carriers; Lowboys; Pickup; Powder Truck Driver; Power Boom; Serviceman; Service Truck/Fuel Truck/Tireperson; Truck Mechanic; Trucks with Power Equipment; Warehouseman, Partsman, Cardex and Warehouse Expeditor; Water Trucks. Zone Pay: 0-25 mi. free zone >25-50 mi. base pay + $2.50/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $3.00/hr. TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS Wage Benefit District 1 $20.30 $8.10 District 2 $23.06 $8.36 District 3 $22.05 $7.20 District 4 $24.11 $7.11 Duties Include: Install voice; sound; vision and data systems. This occupation includes burglar alarms, fire alarms, fiber optic systems, and video systems for security or entertainment. Travel: All Districts The federal mileage rate/mi. in effect when travel occurs if using own vehicle. Per Diem: All Districts Employer pays for meals and lodging up to $65.00/day. When jobsite is located in Big Sky, West Yellowstone and Gardiner, lodging and meals will be provided by the employer for all actual and reasonable expenses incurred. TILE AND MARBLE SETTERS No Rate Established Duties Include: Apply hard tile, marble, and wood tile to floors, ceilings, and roof decks (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SUMMARY 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Access to site. 5. Coordination with occupants. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Alfred M. Stiff Professional Building – Interior Alteration 1. Project Location: 20 East Olive; Bozeman, Montana 59715. B. Owner: City of Bozeman 1. Owner's Representative: Chuck Winn Assistant City Manger 121 North Rouse Bozeman, Montana 59715 C. Architect: Bill Hanson ThinkOne 101 East Main, Studio 1 Bozeman, Montana 59715. D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Civil Engineer: None 2. Structural Engineer: John Cooney Beaudette Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1289 Stoneridge Drive Bozeman, Montana 59718 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SUMMARY 011000 - 2 3. Mechanical Engineer: Nick Tolstead Associated Construction Engineering, Inc. 12 North Broadway Belgrade, Montana 59714 4. Electrical Engineer: Jerad Meidinger Associated Construction Engineering, Inc. 12 North Broadway Belgrade, Montana 59714 E. Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. <Insert title of design discipline>: <Insert name and contact information for consultant>. <Insert title of design discipline> has prepared the following portions of the Contract Documents: a. <Insert description of scope of service for other Owner consultant>. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Limited interior renovation of existing partitions, casework, and finishes. 2. Limited interior renovation of existing plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems. 3. Limited site renovations, including excavation, concrete foundations, final grading, and landscaping. 4. Installation of new windows. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION A. The Work shall be conducted in one single phase, but shall be sequenced as outlined on Drawings. 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SUMMARY 011000 - 3 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: Coordinate with Owner. 2. Early Morning Hours: Coordinate with Owner. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner. 4. Hours for Core Drilling or other noisy construction: Coordinate with Owner. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two working days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two working days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SUMMARY 011000 - 4 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 SECTION 012300 -ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1.Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2.The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A.Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1.Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B.Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C.Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D.Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A.Alternate No.1: Light well located near northeast corner of building. 1.Base Bid: Existing site conditions and foundation wall remain as is. 2.Alternate: In general, excavate and install new concrete retaining walls, saw-cut openings into existing foundation wall, and install new windows. Refer to Drawings for additional, related work. END OF SECTION 012300 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 SECTION 012500 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2.Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer an advantage to Contractor or Owner. B.Prior Approved Equal: A product or system that requires prior approval and for which substitution requests will only be considered prior to the scheduled deadline for the receipt of bids. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.Substitution Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 2.Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a.Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.b.Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.c.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d.Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.e.Samples, where applicable or requested. f.Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.g.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h.Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.i.Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j.Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.k.Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l.Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.m.Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3.Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a.Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b.Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.5 PROCEDURES A.Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A.Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than (10)ten working days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1.Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a.Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b.Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c.Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d.Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.e.Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f.Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.g.Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h.If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B.Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1.Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a.Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b.Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c.Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.d.Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4 e.Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f.Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.g.Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h.Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.i.Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j.If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Section: Refer to Construction Agreement for additional requirements pertaining to changes to the work. Where discrepancies exist, the Construction Agreement shall take precedence. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form acceptable to Architect. 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or (10) ten days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. If the contractor initiated change provides a solution that is either a quality improvement or cost savings to the client, the contractor will identify either how the proposal improves the project, and/or the cost benefit to the owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Provide the same detail for either a change that adds cost to the contract, or a change that provides a savings to the owner. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on form included in Project Manual. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Section: Refer to Construction Agreement for additional requirements pertaining to payment procedures. Where discrepancies exist, the Construction Agreement shall take precedence. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work; provide subschedules showing values correlated with each element. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of form included in Project Manual. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of Contract Sum. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms included in Project Manual as form for Applications for Payment. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment. b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. c. Additional materials stored with this Application. d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Copies of building permits. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 6. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 SECTION 013100 -PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1.General project coordination procedures.2.Administrative and supervisory personnel.3.Coordination drawings. 4.Requests for Information (RFIs).5.Project meetings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction. 1.3 COORDINATION A.Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.2.Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3.Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B.Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1.Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C.Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 1.Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.2.Preparation of the schedule of values. 3.Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4.Delivery and processing of submittals.5.Progress meetings. 6.Pre-installation conferences.7.Project closeout activities.8.Startup and adjustment of systems. 9.Project closeout activities. D.Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1.Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1.Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a.Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.b.Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c.Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.d.Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.e.Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f.Indicate required installation sequences.g.Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 B.Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1.Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.2.Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.3.Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical equipment.4.Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.5.Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.6.Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a.Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b.Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.c.Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7.Electrical Work: Show the following: a.Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger.b.Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire alarm locations. c.Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d.Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8.Fire Protection System: Show the following: a.Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9.Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 1.5 KEY PERSONNEL A.Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.2.Changes in Key Personnel must be presented to the owner (30) calendar days prior to the change being implemented. The contractor ensures that to the extent of their control, Project Superintendent and Project Engineer (if included) will remain on this project throughout the duration of the construction period. Changes for the convenience of the construction company will not be construed as advantageous to the owner and are not acceptable. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A.General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents,Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1.Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.2.Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B.Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1.Project name.2.Project number.3.Date. 4.Name of Contractor. 5.Name of Architect.6.RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7.RFI subject. 8.Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10.Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11.Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12.Contractor's signature.13.Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 a.Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C.RFI Forms: Form bound in the Project Manual. D.Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1.The following RFIs will be returned without action: a.Requests for approval of submittals.b.Requests for approval of substitutions.c.Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.e.Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f.Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2.Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.3.Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a.If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E.On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. F.RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly. Include the following: 1.Project name.2.Name and address of Contractor. 3.Name and address of Architect. 4.RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.5.RFI description. 6.Date the RFI was submitted.7.Date Architect's response was received.8.Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.9.Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A.General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.2.Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3.Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within seven days of the meeting. B.Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1.Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.2.Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.3.Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a.Tentative construction schedule.b.Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c.Designation of key personnel and their duties.d.Lines of communications.e.Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f.Procedures for RFIs. g.Procedures for testing and inspecting.h.Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i.Distribution of the Contract Documents. j.Submittal procedures.k.Preparation of record documents. l.Use of the premises.m.Work restrictions.n.Working hours. o.Owner's occupancy requirements.p.Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q.Procedures for moisture and mold control. r.Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.s.Construction waste management and recycling. t.Parking availability.u.Office, work, and storage areas.v.Equipment deliveries and priorities. w.First aid. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 x.Security.y.Progress cleaning. 4.Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C.Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1.Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.2.Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a.Contract Documents. b.Options.c.Related RFIs.d.Related Change Orders. e.Purchases.f.Deliveries.g.Submittals. h.Review of mockups.i.Possible conflicts. j.Compatibility problems. k.Time schedules.l.Weather limitations. m.Manufacturer's written recommendations.n.Warranty requirements.o.Compatibility of materials. p.Acceptability of substrates. q.Temporary facilities and controls.r.Space and access limitations. s.Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t.Testing and inspecting requirements.u.Installation procedures. v.Coordination with other work.w.Required performance results.x.Protection of adjacent work. y.Protection of construction and personnel. 3.Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4.Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5.Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 D.Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1.Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2.Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.3.Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a.Preparation of record documents.b.Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance.c.Submittal of written warranties.d.Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. e.Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.f.Requirements for demonstration and training.g.Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h.Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i.Submittal procedures. j.Owner's partial occupancy requirements.k.Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. l.Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4.Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E.Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1.Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2.Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3.Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9 1)Review schedule for next period. b.Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1)Interface requirements.2)Sequence of operations. 3)Status of submittals.4)Deliveries.5)Off-site fabrication. 6)Access.7)Site utilization.8)Temporary facilities and controls. 9)Progress cleaning. 10)Quality and work standards.11)Status of correction of deficient items. 12)Field observations.13)Status of RFIs.14)Status of proposal requests. 15)Pending changes.16)Status of Change Orders.17)Pending claims and disputes. 18)Documentation of information for payment requests. 4.Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a.Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F.Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and pre-installation conferences. 1.Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.2.Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited;secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 -10 current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b.Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.c.Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1)Interface requirements.2)Sequence of operations.3)Status of submittals. 4)Deliveries. 5)Off-site fabrication.6)Access. 7)Site utilization.8)Temporary facilities and controls.9)Work hours. 10)Hazards and risks.11)Progress cleaning.12)Quality and work standards. 13)Change Orders. 3.Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 SECTION 013200 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1.Contractor's construction schedule.2.Field condition reports.3.Special reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1.Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2.Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.3.Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B.Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C.CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project. D.Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E.Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F.Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1.Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2.Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 3.Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G.Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1.PDF electronic file. B.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. C.Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. D.Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 1.4 COORDINATION A.Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B.Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1.Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.2.Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1.Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B.Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1.Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 2.Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.3.Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.4.Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 15 days for startup and testing. 5.Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6.Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final completion. C.Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. D.Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion E.Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1.Unresolved issues. 2.Unanswered RFIs. 3.Rejected or unreturned submittals.4.Notations on returned submittals. F.Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A.General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B.CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1.Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a.Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 2.Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3.Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.4.Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to correlate with Contract Time. C.CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1.Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a.Preparation and processing of submittals.b.Mobilization and demobilization. c.Purchase of materials.d.Delivery.e.Fabrication. f.Utility interruptions.g.Installation. h.Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i.Testing.j.Punch list and final completion. k.Commissioning.l.Activities occurring following final completion. 2.Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.3.Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time- scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4.Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a.Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. D.Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. E.Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 1.Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.2.Description of activity. 3.Principal events of activity. 4.Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.5.Early and late start dates. 6.Early and late finish dates.7.Activity duration in workdays.8.Total float or slack time. 9.Average size of workforce.10.Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). F.Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1.Identification of activities that have changed.2.Changes in early and late start dates. 3.Changes in early and late finish dates.4.Changes in activity durations in workdays.5.Changes in the critical path. 6.Changes in total float or slack time.7.Changes in the Contract Time. G.Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1.In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2.In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.3.In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date.4.Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a.In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom.b.Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.3 REPORTS A.Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A.General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 B.Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1.Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.2.Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.3.As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B.Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect,Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1.Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.2.When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals. B.Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals. C.Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.3 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1.Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2.Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.3.Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4.Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a.Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 B.Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1.Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.2.Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.3.Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.4.Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. C.Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1.Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.2.Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.3.Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a.Project name. b.Date.c.Name of Architect. d.Name of Construction Manager. e.Name of Contractor.f.Name of subcontractor. g.Name of supplier.h.Name of manufacturer.i.Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. j.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.l.Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m.Other necessary identification. D.Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. E.Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. F.Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. G.Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1.Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 a.Project name.b.Date. c.Destination (To:). d.Source (From:).e.Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f.Category and type of submittal.g.Submittal purpose and description.h.Specification Section number and title. i.Indication of full or partial submittal.j.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.k.Transmittal number. l.Submittal and transmittal distribution record. m.Remarks.n.Signature of transmitter. 2.On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. H.Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1.Note date and content of previous submittal. 2.Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.3.Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I.Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J.Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.Action Submittals: Submit in PDF format. 2.Informational Submittals: Submit in PDF format.3.Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 4.Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.5.Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B.Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1.If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2.Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.3.Include the following information, as applicable: a.Manufacturer's catalog cuts.b.Manufacturer's product specifications.c.Standard color charts. d.Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.e.Testing by recognized testing agency.f.Application of testing agency labels and seals. g.Notation of coordination requirements.h.Availability and delivery time information. 4.For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a.Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.b.Printed performance curves. c.Operational range diagrams.d.Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5.Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6.Submit Product Data in the following format:PDF. C.Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1.Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a.Identification of products.b.Schedules. c.Compliance with specified standards.d.Notation of coordination requirements. e.Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f.Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.g.Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 2.Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3.Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:PDF. D.Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1.Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.2.Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a.Generic description of Sample. b.Product name and name of manufacturer.c.Sample source. d.Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3.Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a.Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b.Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4.Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures,and patterns available. a.Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5.Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a.Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 1)Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2)If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E.Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1.Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents. 2.Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3.Number and name of room or space.4.Location within room or space. 5.Submit product schedule in the following format:PDF. F.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G.Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." H.Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." I.Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use form included in Project Manual and titled Acknowledgement of Subcontractors.Include the following information in tabular form: 1.Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.2.Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3.Submit subcontract list in the following format: PDF. J.Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." K.Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. L.Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 M.Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. N.Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. O.Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P.Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q.Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. R.Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. S.Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1.Name of evaluation organization.2.Date of evaluation. 3.Time period when report is in effect. 4.Product and manufacturers' names.5.Description of product. 6.Test procedures and results.7.Limitations of use. T.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." U.Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V.Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W.Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 X.Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Y.Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A.Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1.If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B.Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1.Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A.Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B.Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." C.Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A.General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B.Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C.Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D.Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. E.Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. F.Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 SECTION 014000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B.Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1.Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2.Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3.Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B.Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C.Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. D.Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. E.Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 F.Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G.Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H.Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. I.Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A.Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B.Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel, General Contractor Superintendent and /or Project Manager. B.Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems. 1.Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect. 2.Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect. C.Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. D.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 1.Specification Section number and title.2.Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3.Description of test and inspection. 4.Requirements for obtaining samples. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A.Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1.Date of issue. 2.Project title and number.3.Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4.Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5.Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6.Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7.Identification of product and Specification Section. 8.Complete test or inspection data.9.Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10.Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.11.Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12.Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13.Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B.Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1.Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.2.Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3.Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4.Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5.Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.6.Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7.Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C.Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1.Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2.Statement that equipment complies with requirements.3.Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 4.Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.5.Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D.Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C.Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D.Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F.Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1.NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2.NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. G.Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H.Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I.Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1.Contractor responsibilities include the following: a.Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b.Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.c.Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.d.Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.e.Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f.When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2.Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A.Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1.Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.2.Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B.Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required toverify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1.Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2.Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 a.Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3.Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.4.Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.5.Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6.Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C.Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." D.Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E.Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F.Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1.Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2.Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3.Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.4.Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.5.Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6.Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G.Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1.Access to the Work. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 2.Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3.Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4.Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5.Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6.Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.7.Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H.Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1.Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. . 1.Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A.Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1.Date test or inspection was conducted. 2.Description of the Work tested or inspected.3.Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4.Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B.Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A.General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1.Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution." B.Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C.Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.2 USE CHARGES A.General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,Owner's construction forces,Architect,occupants of Project,testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B.Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C.Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1- 5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide bases for supporting posts. B.Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 C.Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A.Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B.HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1.Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2.Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3.Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures". C.Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B.Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with the following: 1.Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 B.Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2.Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. C.Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. D.Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1.Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.2.Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E.Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." F.Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. G.Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1.Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.2.Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. H.Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1.Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B.Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C.Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. D.Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E.Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F.Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1.Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. G.Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. H.Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. I.Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1.Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. J.Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. K.Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1.Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2.Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A.Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B.Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1.Protect porous materials from water damage.2.Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.3.Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.4.Remove standing water from decks.5.Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C.Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1.Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.2.Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3.Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.4.Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5.Do not install material that is wet.6.Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7.Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D.Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1.Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. Use temporary heating source that does not create additional moisture and humidity in the space.2.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a.Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.b.Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record daily readings over a forty-eight hour period. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c.Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A.Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1.Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. B.Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. C.Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1.Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2.At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1.Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.2.New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.3.Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B.Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2.Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a.Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."b.Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B.Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B.Delivery and Handling: 1.Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.2.Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3.Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4.Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C.Storage: 1.Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2.Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3.Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather-tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.4.Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5.Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 6.Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.7.Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A.Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.2.Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B.Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1.Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.2.Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.3.Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C.Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A.General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1.Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2.Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3.Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.5.Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 6.Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B.Product Selection Procedures: 1.Products: a.Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 2.Manufacturers: a.Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 3.Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C.Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1.If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. D.Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. E.Select products that contain no CFC’s or ACM material. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A.Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.3.Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.4.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5.Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 1 SECTION 017300 -EXECUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Construction layout.2.Field engineering and surveying.3.Installation of the Work. 4.Cutting and patching.5.Progress cleaning.6.Starting and adjusting. 7.Protection of installed construction. 8.Correction of the Work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B.Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1.Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection2.Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following but are not limited to the following: a.Primary operational systems and equipment. b.Fire separation assemblies.c.Air or smoke barriers. d.Fire-suppression systems. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 2 e.Mechanical systems piping and ducts.f.Control systems. g.Communication systems. h.Conveying systems.i.Electrical wiring systems. j.Operating systems of special construction. 3.Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a.Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b.Membranes and flashings.c.Exterior curtain-wall construction. d.Equipment supports.e.Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.f.Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4.Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B.Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B.In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1.If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities,mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. B.Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1.Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a.Description of the Work.b.List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c.List of unacceptable installation tolerances.d.Recommended corrections. 2.Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.3.Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4.Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B.Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C.Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 4 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A.Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings relative to existing structure and property boundaries. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B.Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including retaining walls, grading transitions, and landscape areas. 3.4 INSTALLATION A.General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1.Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2.Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3.Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.4.Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C.Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D.Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E.Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F.Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G.Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1.Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.2.Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3.Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 5 bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H.Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I.Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1.Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. C.Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D.Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Summary." E.Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. F.Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1.In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2.Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3.Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.4.Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 6 5.Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6.Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. G.Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1.Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2.Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a.Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.b.Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3.Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a.Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4.Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5.Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. H.Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A.General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1.Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.2.Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 7 3.Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a.Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4.Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. B.Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C.Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1.Remove liquid spills promptly.2.Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D.Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E.Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F.Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G.Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H.During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I.Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J.Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A.Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXECUTION 017300 - 8 B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C.Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D.Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E.Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A.Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A.Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1.Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B.Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C.Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D.Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E.Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1.Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B.Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C.Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A.General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B.Burning: Do not burn waste materials. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2 C.Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Substantial Completion procedures.2.Final completion procedures.3.Warranties. 4.Final cleaning. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1.Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.2.Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.3.Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.4.Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.5.Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.6.Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.7.Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8.Complete startup testing of systems.9.Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10.Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.11.Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12.Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.13.Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14.Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 B.Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2.Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A.Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1.Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."2.Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list, including commissioning deficiencies), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.3.Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.4.Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B.Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A.Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1.Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.2.Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.3.Include the following information at the top of each page: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 a.Project name.b.Date. c.Name of Architect. d.Name of Contractor.e.Page number. 4.Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a.PDF electronic file. 1.5 WARRANTIES A.Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B.Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C.Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1.Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.2.Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3.Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4.Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document. D.Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A.General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B.Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an good quality commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a.Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b.Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.c.Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface.d.Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e.Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f.Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g.Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h.Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i.Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j.Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.k.Remove labels that are not permanent. l.Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1)Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 m.Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment,elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n.Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. o.Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.p.Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.q.Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection. r.Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.s.Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C.Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." END OF SECTION 017700 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 SECTION 017823 -OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1.Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.2.Product maintenance manuals.3.Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1.Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions. B.Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1.Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. C.Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D.Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1.Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1.Title page. 2.Table of contents.3.Manual contents. B.Title Page: Include the following information: 1.Subject matter included in manual.2.Name and address of Project. 3.Name and address of Owner.4.Date of submittal.5.Name and contact information for Contractor. 6.Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7.Name and contact information for Architect.8.Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent. 9.Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals.10.Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C.Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1.If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D.Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E.Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1.Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a.If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.b.Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 2.Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.3.Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.4.Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.5.Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a.If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b.If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 OPERATION MANUALS A.Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1.System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2.Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.3.Operating standards. 4.Operating procedures. 5.Operating logs.6.Wiring diagrams. 7.Control diagrams.8.Piped system diagrams.9.Precautions against improper use. 10.License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B.Descriptions: Include the following: 1.Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2.Manufacturer's name.3.Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4.Equipment function.5.Operating characteristics.6.Limiting conditions. 7.Performance curves.8.Engineering data and tests. 9.Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C.Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1.Startup procedures. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 2.Equipment or system break-in procedures.3.Routine and normal operating instructions. 4.Regulation and control procedures. 5.Instructions on stopping.6.Normal shutdown instructions. 7.Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9.Special operating instructions and procedures. D.Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E.Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B.Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C.Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1.Product name and model number. 2.Manufacturer's name.3.Color, pattern, and texture. 4.Material and chemical composition.5.Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D.Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1.Inspection procedures.2.Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3.List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4.Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5.Repair instructions. E.Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F.Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 1.Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B.Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C.Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1.Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.2.Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.3.Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4.List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D.Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1.Test and inspection instructions. 2.Troubleshooting guide.3.Precautions against improper maintenance. 4.Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.5.Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6.Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E.Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1.Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2.Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F.Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 G.Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H.Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A.Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. C.Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1.Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. D.Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1.Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2.Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." E.Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7 END OF SECTION 017823 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1.Record Drawings.2.Record Product Data. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1.Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. B.Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal. 1.Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A.Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1.Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a.Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Provide measurements to key hidden installations for future location by the owner. b.Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c.Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d.Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e.Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 2.Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Dimensional changes to Drawings. b.Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c.Depths of foundations below first floor. d.Locations and elevations of underground utilities.e.Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f.Revisions to electrical circuitry. g.Actual equipment locations.h.Duct size and routing.i.Locations of concealed internal utilities. j.Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k.Changes made following Architect's written orders.l.Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m.Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n.Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3.Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.4.Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. Clearly mark drawings so they can be easily read and the information communicated. 5.Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6.Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B.Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1.Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2.Format: Paper copy. 3.Identification: As follows: a.Project name. b.Date.c.Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d.Name of Architect. e.Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A.Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 1.Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2.Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.3.Note related Change Orders,record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B.Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A.Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B.Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1 SECTION 017900 -DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1.Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2.Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.3 COORDINATION A.Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A.Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B.Training Modules: For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1.Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a.System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.b.Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.c.Operating standards.d.Regulatory requirements. e.Equipment function. f.Operating characteristics.g.Limiting conditions. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2 h.Performance curves. 2.Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a.Emergency manuals. b.Operations manuals.c.Maintenance manuals. d.Project record documents.e.Identification systems.f.Warranties and bonds. g.Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3.Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a.Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b.Instructions on stopping.c.Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d.Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.e.Sequences for electric or electronic systems.f.Special operating instructions and procedures. 4.Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a.Startup procedures.b.Equipment or system break-in procedures. c.Routine and normal operating instructions.d.Regulation and control procedures. e.Control sequences. f.Safety procedures.g.Instructions on stopping. h.Normal shutdown instructions.i.Operating procedures for emergencies.j.Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k.Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.m.Special operating instructions and procedures. 5.Adjustments: Include the following: a.Alignments.b.Checking adjustments. c.Noise and vibration adjustments.d.Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6.Troubleshooting: Include the following: a.Diagnostic instructions.b.Test and inspection procedures. 7.Maintenance: Include the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3 a.Inspection procedures.b.Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c.List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d.Procedures for routine cleaninge.Procedures for preventive maintenance. f.Procedures for routine maintenance.g.Instruction on use of special tools. 8.Repairs: Include the following: a.Diagnosis instructions.b.Repair instructions.c.Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d.Instructions for identifying parts and components.e.Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION A.Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. B.Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. END OF SECTION 017900 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 2. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. e. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris- removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 –CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following: 1.Footings2.Foundation walls. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Material certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1.Cementitious materials.2.Admixtures. 3.Form materials and form-release agents.4.Steel reinforcement and accessories. B.Material test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B.Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 C.ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1.ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2.ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." D.Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A.Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B.Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C.Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. D.Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. E.Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1.Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm)to the plane of exposed concrete surface.2.Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm)in diameter in concrete surface. 3.Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A.Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. a.Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. B.Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 1.Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated in drawings2.Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C.Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A.Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B.Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1.Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.2.Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3.Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4.High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.5.High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.6.Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A.Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES A.Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B.Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. C.Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 1.Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2.Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.3.Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete. D.Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1.Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated in Drawings2.Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated in Drawings 3.Slump Limit: As indicated in Drawings4.Air Content: As indicated in Drawings 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A.Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1.When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A.Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B.Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C.Chamfer concrete as shown on Drawings. D.Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1.Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm). E.Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. F.Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 G.Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. H.Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. I.Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. J.Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A.Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1.Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A.General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B.Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C.When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. B.Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C.Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 D.Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.5 JOINTS A.General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B.Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B.Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C.Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1.Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D.Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1.Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.2.Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3.Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm)into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E.Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 2.Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3.Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F.Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1.Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C)at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.2.Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A.Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1.Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B.Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height. 1.Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 2.Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth form finish. C.Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1.Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2.Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. D.Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A.Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A.General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B.Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq.ft. x h (1 kg/sq.m x h)before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A.Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B.Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No.16 (1.18-mm)sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C.Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1.Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm)in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.2.Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.3.Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B.Inspections: Provide the following inspections: 1.Steel reinforcement placement. 2.Verification of use of required design mixture.3.Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.4.Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. C.Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1.Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd.(4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd.(19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.(38 cu. m)or fraction thereof.2.Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.3.Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.4.Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C)and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5.Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a.Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b.Field-cured specimens in first subparagraph below may be required to verify adequacy of curing and protection of concrete, to verify strength for tilt-up concrete and post-tensioning concrete, or to verify strength for removal of shoring and reshoring in multistory construction. Revise number of test specimens if required.c.Additional field cure concrete cylinders will be provided at the request and cost of the contractor. 6.Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a.Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.b.A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7.When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -10 8.Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).9.Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. 10.Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11.Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13.Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 033000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 SECTION 055213 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Steel pipe and tube railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a.Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft.applied in any direction.b.Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c.Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.Infill of Guards: a.Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b.Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B.Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A.Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A.Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)or ASTM A 513. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 B.Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. C.Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D.Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Fasteners: Provide the following: 1.Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.2.Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B.Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchorscapable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C.Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. D.Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. E.Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F.Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." G.Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. H.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.4 FABRICATION A.Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B.Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 C.Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.2.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3.Remove flux immediately.4.At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. D.Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. E.Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. F.Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. G.Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. H.Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A.Galvanized Railings: 1.Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2.Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3.Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B.Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. C.Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." D.Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1.Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1.Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.2.Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3.Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. B.Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset metal pipe sleeves or formed or core- drilled holes and grouting annular space. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B.Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055213 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1 SECTION 061053 -MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Framing with dimension lumber. 2.Wood blocking and nailers.3.Plywood backing panels. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1.Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.2.Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B.Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent,unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A.Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground. 1.Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B.Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C.Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D.Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2 1.Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3.Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.4.Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.5.Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A.Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No.2 grade of the following species: B.Other Framing: Construction or No.2 grade and the following species: 1.Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.2.Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A.General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1.Blocking. 2.Nailers. B.For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No.2 grade lumber of any species. C.For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1.Western woods, Construction or No.2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A.General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 3 1.Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel. B.Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C.Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound,bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B.Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C.Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D.Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. E.Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. F.Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber. G.Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1.NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.2.Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. END OF SECTION 061053 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1 SECTION 064116 -PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2.Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C.Samples: 1.Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 2.Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS A.Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, available fabricators offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Capital City Millworks; 1826 North Last Chance Gulch; Helena, Montana 59601. 2.Kralicek Millworks; 3030 East Lyndale Avenue, Helena, Montana 59601.3.Le Cabinet Shoppe, Inc.; 302 25th Avenue West; Laurel, Montana 59044.4.Moderne Cabinet; 400 Huffman Avenue; Great Falls, Montana 59404. 5.Pyramid Cabinet Shop; PO Box 31511; Billings, Montana 59107. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2 6.TMI Storage Systems Corp.; 50 South Third Avenue West; Dickenson, North Dakota 58601-5595 7.Approved equal. 2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B.Grade: Custom. C.Type of Construction: Frameless. D.Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E.High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Formica Corporation.b.Nevamar Decorative Surfaces. c.Pionite Decorative Surfaces; Div. of Panolam Industries International, Inc.d.Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.e.Approved equal. F.Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1.Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2.Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3.Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. G.Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1.Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS.2.Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3.Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H.Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. I.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3 1.As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a.Solid colors, matte finish. b.Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish.c.Wood grains, matte finish. d.Patterns, matte finish. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A.Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B.Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.2.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.3.Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 4.Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.5.Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B.Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening,self-closing. C.Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. D.Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. E.Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1.Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc- plated-steel ball-bearing slides. F.Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4 G.Exposed Hardware Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard finishes. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B.Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C.Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D.Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer’s standard. 1.Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Manufacturer’s standard. 2.6 FABRICATION A.Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. B.Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B.Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C.Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5 D.Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E.Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1.Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.2.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No.10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2- inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. END OF SECTION 064116 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION WOOD TRIM 064600 - 1 SECTION 064600 -WOOD TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior standing and running trim. 2.Shop priming of wood trim.3.Shop finishing of wood trim. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.Grade: Custom. B.Wood Species and Cut: Match existing woodwork as directed by Architect. 1.Species: White birch (assumed).2.Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn (assumed). 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A.Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber,kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B.Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION WOOD TRIM 064600 - 2 C.VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1.Wood Glues: 30 g/L.2.Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.5 FABRICATION A.Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1.Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.2.Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. B.Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A.Interior Wood Trim for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing." B.Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A.General: The extent to which woodwork is shop-finished is up to the Contractor. Finish such items at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing"for field finishing wood trim not indicated to be shop finished. B.Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. C.Transparent Finish for Interior Trim: 1.Grade: Custom. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION WOOD TRIM 064600 - 3 2.Finish: System -11, catalyzed polyurethane.3.Staining: Match existing woodwork as directed by Architect. 4.Sheen: Satin,31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B.Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C.Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D.Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1.For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. E.Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1.Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. END OF SECTION 064600 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 1 SECTION 064800 -WOOD FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior frames and jambs. 2.Shop priming wood frames and jambs.3.Shop finishing wood frames and jambs. 1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood frames until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL A.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.Grade: Custom. B.Wood Species and Cut: Match existing woodwork as directed by Architect. 1.Species: White birch (assumed).2.Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn (assumed). 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A.Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 2 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B.Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.5 FABRICATION A.Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1.Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A.Interior Wood Frames for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing." B.Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood frames, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A.General: The extent to which woodwork is shop-finished is up to the Contractor. Finish such items at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing"for field finishing wood frames not indicated to be shop finished. B.Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood frames, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood frames. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. C.Transparent Finish for Interior Frames: 1.Grade: Custom. 2.Finish: System -11, catalyzed polyurethane.3.Staining: Match existing woodwork as directed by Architect. 4.Sheen: Satin,31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B.Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C.Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D.Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1.For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. END OF SECTION 064800 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1 SECTION 071113 -BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes cold-applied, cut-back-and emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A.VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise required. 2.2 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.2.ChemMasters, Inc.3.Henry Company. 4.Malarkey Roofing Products.5.Meadows, W.R., Inc. B.Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered. C.Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered or nonfibered. D.VOC Content: 300 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.3 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 2 1.BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.2.ChemMasters, Inc. 3.Henry Company. 4.Malarkey Roofing Products.5.Meadows, W.R., Inc. B.Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. C.Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. D.Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. E.VOC Content: 30 g/L or less. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. B.Cut-Back-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. C.Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer. D.Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. E.Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578, Type X, 1/2 inch thick. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate preparation, dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.2.Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage. 3.2 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A.Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft.. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 3 3.3 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A.Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft.. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A.Where recommended by manufacturer, install protection course over completed-and- cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing-material and protection-course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection course. END OF SECTION 071113 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 2.Spray polyurethane foam insulation.3.Vapor retarders. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.CertainTeed Corporation.2.Johns Manville.3.Knauf Insulation. 4.Owens Corning. B.Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1.Used for both thermal and acoustical applications. 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A.Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B.Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B.Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C.Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D.Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A.Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1.Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.2.Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.3.Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4.For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. B.Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1.Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A.Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 B.Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1.Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C.Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. D.Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. END OF SECTION 072100 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Silicone joint sealants. 2.Urethane joint sealants.3.Latex joint sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B.Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C.Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. D.Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1.When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2.When joint substrates are wet.3.Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.4.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 1.5 WARRANTY A.Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A.Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B.Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C.Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b.GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.d.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. B.Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS 791.b.GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000 SilPruf SCS2000 UltraPruf II SCS2900. c.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.d.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 C.Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b.GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000UltraGlazeSSG4000AC.c.Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG Tremsil 600. D.Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Dow Corning Corporation; 790.b.Pecora Corporation; 301 NS 311 NS. c.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800. E.Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Pecora Corporation; 898. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -15LM.b.Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921. B.Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 LM Type II. b.Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-901. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 C.Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. b.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -1a.c.Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic Vulkem 116. D.Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -1a. b.Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A.Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.b.Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B.Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)Type O (open-cell material)Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C.Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B.Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C.Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a.Concrete. 3.Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4.Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 a.Metal.b.Glass. B.Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C.Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B.Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C.Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1.Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D.Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E.Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1.Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2.Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3.Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F.Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1.Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2.Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7 3.Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4.Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5.Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a.Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A.Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A.Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A.Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b.Other joints as indicated. 2.Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3.Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade.4.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B.Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Joints between metal panels.b.Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. c.Other joints as indicated. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8 2.Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50 Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 25 Single component, nonsag, acid curing. 3.Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 100/50 Single component, nonsag, Class 50 Single component, nonsag, Class 25. 4.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b.Other joints as indicated. 2.Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3.Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade.4.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.Joint Locations: a.Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.b.Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. 2.Joint Sealant: Latex Acrylic based.3.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of END OF SECTION 079200 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 SECTION 081416 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2.Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1.Dimensions and locations of blocking.2.Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3.Dimensions and locations of cutouts.4.Undercuts.5.Requirements for veneer matching. 6.Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. C.Samples: For factory-finished doors. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2.Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.3.Oshkosh Door Company.4.Vancouver Door Company. 5.VT Industries, Inc. 6.Approved equal. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A.Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." B.Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. C.WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1.Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. D.Particleboard-Core Doors: 1.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2,made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.2.Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1.Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.2.Species: Select white birch.3.Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4.Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.5.Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.6.Core: Particleboard. 7.Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. 8.Light Frames and Louvers: Flush wood moulding matching specie of door face veneer. 2.4 FABRICATION A.Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B.Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C.Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1.Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.2.Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A.General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1.Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B.Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. C.Transparent Finish: 1.Grade: Premium.2.Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.3.Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4.Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores.5.Sheen: Satin. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B.Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C.Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1.Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. D.Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E.Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. END OF SECTION 081416 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 SECTION 084113 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Storefront framing for punched openings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1.Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2.Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.3.Failure includes the following: a.Deflection exceeding specified limits.b.Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.c.Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing.d.Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e.Loosening or weakening of fasteners,attachments, and other components. B.Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C.Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D.Deflection of Framing Members: 1.Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.2.Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E.Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 1.When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.2.Test Durations: 10 seconds. F.Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft.of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. G.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. C.Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D.Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B.Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. C.Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 1.6 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B.Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Oldcastle Building Envelope, Series 3000 Thermal Multiplane; or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 2.United States Aluminum. 3.Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 4.Approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A.Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A.Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1.Construction: Thermally broken.2.Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3.Glazing Plane: Center. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 B.Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C.Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1.Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.2.Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.3.Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads,finished to match framing system. D.Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E.Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F.Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1.Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A.Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." B.Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C.Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.6 FABRICATION A.Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B.Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1.Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2.Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5 3.Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4.Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5.Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6.Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.7.Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C.Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. D.After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A.Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1.Color: Dark bronze]. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2.Do not install damaged components. 3.Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4.Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5.Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.6.Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B.Metal Protection: 1.Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2.Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C.Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D.Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6 E.Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F.Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." END OF SECTION 084113 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 -DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.Mechanical door hardware for the following: a.Swinging doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Other Action Submittals: 1.Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a.Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.b.Content: Include the following information: 1)Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.2)Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.3)Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 1.4 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A.Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. B.Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 1.Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required and establish the “basis of design.” Manufacturers' names are abbreviated as follows: a.GJ: Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company. b.HAG: Hager Companies.c.IVS: IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.d.SCH: Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 2.2 HINGES A.Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a.Bommer Industries, Inc. b.McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c.Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.d.Approved equal. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A.Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1.Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. B.Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:2.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a.Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b.Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.c.SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d.Approved equal. 2.4 KEYING A.Permanent cores and keying by Owner. Coordinate core type and other requirements with Owner prior to ordering locking hardware. 2.5 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A.Wall-and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a.Hager Companies.b.Approved equal. 2.6 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A.Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 a.SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.b.Approved equal. 2.7 FABRICATION A.Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2.Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.8 FINISHES A.Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." B.Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the followingunless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1.Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." C.Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 1.Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2.Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. D.Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. E.Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. F.Stops: Provide wall stops for doors as indicated in door hardware schedule. G.Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Door Hardware Set No.:.......1 Door Number:.......................002, to have the following: Qty.Item Manufacturer / Model Finish Comments / Function 3 Hinges HC, BB1279, 4.5”x4.5”26D Steel with steel pin 1 Lockset SCH, ND Series, ND50PD, Rhodes trim, Standard cylinder 626 Entrance /Office (F82) function 1 Stop GJ, 100 Series, 100S 26D Overhead, concealed, stop only Door Hardware Set No.:.......2 Door Number:.......................003, 004;each to have the following: Qty.Item Manufacturer / Model Finish Comments / Function 3 Hinges HC, BB1279, 4.5”x4.5”26D Steel with steel pin 1 Latchset SCH, ND Series, ND10S, Rhodes trim, Standard cylinder 626 Passage (F75) function 1 Stop IVS, WS447 26D Wall-mounted Door Hardware Set No.:.......3 Door Number:.......................102, 201, 202;each to have the following: Qty.Item Manufacturer / Model Finish Comments / Function 3 Hinges HC, BB1279, 4.5”x4.5”26D Steel with steel pin 1 Lockset SCH, ND Series, ND50PD, Rhodes trim, Standard cylinder 626 Entrance / Office (F82) function 1 Stop IVS, WS447 26D Wall-mounted END OF SECTION 087100 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GLAZING 088000 - 1 SECTION 088000 -GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1.Windows.2.Doors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1.Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.2.Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.3.Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B.Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C.Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D.Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GLAZING 088000 - 2 1.IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B.Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C.Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.5 WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1.Warranty Period: 10years from date of Substantial Completion. B.Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.Warranty Period: 10years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B.Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat- treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GLAZING 088000 - 3 C.Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1.U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2.Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.3.Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A.Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B.Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. C.Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376, coated by vacuum deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG Industries, Inc., Solarban 60; or comparable product by one of the following: a.Cardinal Glass Industries.b.Approved equal. 2.Kind: Kind CV (coated vision glass). 3.Coating: Low-e.4.Glass: Clear float. 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.PPG Industries, Inc. B.Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1.Sealing System: Dual seal. 2.Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GLAZING 088000 - 4 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A.Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1.Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.2.EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3.Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.4.Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B.Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene,EPDM,silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1.Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A.Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B.Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C.Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D.Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.6 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A.Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1.Thickness: 6.0 mm2.Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.7 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A.Glass Type GL-2: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1.Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.2.Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3.Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass, as required by glass design. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GLAZING 088000 - 5 4.Interspace Content: Air5.Indoor Lite: Float glass, heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass, as required by glass design. 6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.7.Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 8.Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum.9.Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum.10.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. 11.Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A.Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B.Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C.Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D.Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E.Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F.Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G.Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A.Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B.Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GLAZING 088000 - 6 C.Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D.Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E.Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B.Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C.Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D.Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 088000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior gypsum board. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.American Gypsum.2.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3.National Gypsum Company.4.USG Corporation. B.Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1.Thickness: 5/8 inch.2.Long Edges: Tapered. C.Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1.Thickness: 5/8 inch.2.Long Edges: Tapered. 2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES A.Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1.Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B.Joint Tape: 1.Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C.Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. B.Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1.As specificed in Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation.” C.Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b.Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.c.Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.d.USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D.Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." E.Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A.Comply with ASTM C 840. B.Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 C.Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D.Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. E.Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges,and damaged surface areas. F.Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. G.Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1.Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.2.Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a.Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." H.Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. I.Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 092900 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B.Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2.Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A.Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B.Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C.Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong, Fine Fissured Tegular, 1732 or comparable product by one of the following: 1.CertainTeed Corp.2.Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. C.Classification: Type III, Form 2, Pattern C E. D.Color: White. E.LR: 0.84. F.NRC: 0.55,Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795. G.CAC: 35. H.Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. I.Thickness: 3/4 inch. J.Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B.Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong, Prelude XL or comparable product by one of the following: 1.CertainTeed Corp.2.Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. C.Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web,Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 02/11-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 1.Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2.End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped)or butt-edge type. 3.Face Design: Flat, flush. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 4.Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.5.Cap Finish: Painted white. D.Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B.Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 1.Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 095113 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 SECTION 096513 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Resilient base. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B.Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C.Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A.Resilient Base: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b.Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. c.Johnsonite.d.Roppe Corporation, USA. B.Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1.Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).2.Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3.Style: Cove (base with toe). C.Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D.Height: 4 inches. E.Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. F.Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G.Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H.Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I.Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1.Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B.Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 1.Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. C.Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B.Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C.Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D.Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E.Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B.Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1 SECTION 096519 -RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B.Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. B.Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C.Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D.Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E.Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 2.Mannington Mills, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.3.Tarkett, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. B.Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile. C.Wearing Surface: Smooth. D.Thickness: 0.125 inch. E.Size: 12 by 12 inches. F.Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. C.Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B.Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.2.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3 3.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4.Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D.Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1.Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E.Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B.Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1.Lay tiles square with room axis. C.Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1.Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern). D.Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E.Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G.Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B.Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1.Apply two coat(s). C.Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 1 SECTION 096816 -SHEET CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes tufted carpet. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Warrant: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with CRI 104. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 1.8 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 2 2.Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength,excess static discharge, and delamination. 3.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TUFTED CARPET A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Patcraft, Apropos, Options;or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Mannington Commercial, Inc.2.Mohawk Industries, Inc. 3.Shaw Contract Group. B.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C.Pattern: Match Architect's samples. D.Pile Characteristic: Graphic-loop pile. E.Density: 6,000–9,000 oz/yd3. F.Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. G.Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. H.Width: 12 feet. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet[cushion ] manufacturer. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. C.Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2. D.Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B.Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D.Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. E.Installation: Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1.Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." F.Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. G.Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. H.Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. I.Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. K.Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. L.Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1.Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2.Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.3.Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 4 M.Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION 096816 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 SECTION 099113 -EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1.Steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B.Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C.Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A.MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B.Material Compatibility: 1.Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2 2.For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C.VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D.Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 METAL PRIMERS A.Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79. 1.Benjamin Moore, Super Spec HP, Alkyd Metal Primer. 2.PPG Architectural, Speedhide, Int/Ext Rust Inhibitive Steel Primers.3.Sherwin-Williams, Protective & Marine, Kem Bond HS. B.Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76. 1.Benjamin Moore, Corotech, Universal Metal Primer. 2.Sherwin-Williams, Protective & Marine, Kem Bond HS Universal Alkyd Primer. 2.4 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS A.Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9. 1.Benjamin Moore, Corotech, Alkyd Gloss Enamel.2.Durant Performance Coatings, Dur-A-Plex Ultra 900, Exterior Alkyd Gloss. 3.PPG Architectural, Devoe Coatings (US), DEVGUARD 4308 Alkyd Gloss Industrial Enamel.4.Sherwin-Williams, Protective & Marine, Seaguard 1000 Marine. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 3.2 PREPARATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A.Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." B.Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.Steel Substrates: 1.Alkyd System: a.Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal,MPI #79. b.Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.c.Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. d.Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 6),MPI #9. END OF SECTION 099113 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 SECTION 099123 -INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1.Gypsum board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B.Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A.MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B.Material Compatibility: 1.Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.2.For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 C.VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D.Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A.Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. 1.Benjamin Moore, Eco Spec WB, Interior Latex Primer. 2.PPG Architectural, PPG, Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Sealer.3.Sherwin-Williams, ProMar 200 Zero, Interior Latex Primer. 2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS A.Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. 1.Benjamin Moore, Eco Spec WB, Interior Latex Flat Finish.2.PPG Architectural, Speedhide Zero, Interior Zero VOC Latex Flat. 3.Sherwin-Williams, ProMar 200 Zero VOC, Interior Latex Flat. B.Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. 1.Benjamin Moore, Eco Spec WB, Interior Eggshell Finish. 2.PPG Architectural, Speedhide Zero, Interior Zero VOC Latex Satin.3.Sherwin-Williams, ProMar 200 Zero VOC, Interior Latex Eg-Shel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions,with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1.Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C.Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D.Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 3.2 PREPARATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B.Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A.Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." B.Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.Gypsum Board Substrates: 1.Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a.Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,MPI #149. b.Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c.Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1),MPI #143. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 d.Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3),MPI #145. END OF SECTION 099123 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 SECTION 099300 -STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1.Interior Substrates: a.Dressed lumber (finish carpentry). 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B.Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. C.Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the category indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A.MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B.Material Compatibility: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 1.Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2.For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C.VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.2.Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 3.Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. D.Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 WOOD FILLERS A.Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91. 1.Old Masters, Old Masters, Woodgrain Filler.2.Sherwin-Williams, Chemical Coatings, Sher-Wood Natural Wood Filler. 2.4 PRIMERS AND SEALERS A.Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear: MPI #102. 1.Benjamin Moore, Benwood, Quick Dry Sanding Sealer. 2.Sherwin-Williams, Wood Classics, Fast Dry Sanding Sealer. 2.5 STAINS A.Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90. 1.Old Masters, Old Masters, Penetrating Stain.2.Sherwin-Williams, Wood Classics, Interior Oil Stain. 2.6 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES A.Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57. 1.Old Masters, Old Masters, Polyurethane Satin. 2.Sherwin-Williams, Minwax, Polyurethane Clear Satin. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measuredwith an electronic moisture meter. C.Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D.Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B.Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1.After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C.Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1.Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.2.Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION A.Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." B.Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 4 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A.Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces,including wood trim and frames. 1.Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a.Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood,MPI #90.b.First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c.Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. d.Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss Level 4),MPI #57. 2.Polyurethane Varnish System: a.Prime Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.b.Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c.Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss Level 4),MPI #57. END OF SECTION 099300 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 210000 - 1 SECTION 210000 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish and install an automatic sprinkler system to protect as indicated herein and as shown on the Drawings. Connect system to a water supply of sufficient pressure to ensure full and sustained water discharge immediately from sprinkler heads when opened by fire at rated heat temperatures. Water supply shall conform to NFPA water supply requirements with considerations given to the reliability of the public water supply, taking into account probable minimum pressure conditions. The Contractor shall verify site water pressure before submitting shop drawings. B. All portions of the systems shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, details, and specifications and as required by jurisdictional authorities and codes. Jurisdictional authorities and codes shall take precedence over plans, details and specifications in the event of a dispute between the requirements of contract documents and jurisdictional authorities or codes. C. The position is taken that the Owner is entitled to a project which meets or exceeds the minimum requirements of nationally recognized fire protection standards. All efforts and installations shall be directed toward this end. All deficiencies as noted by fire rating bureaus, insurance service offices or jurisdictional authorities shall be corrected. No extra charges will be allowed on this account. D. The intent of these specifications is to describe the complete systems to be installed, including minor details of work or materials not specifically mentioned or shown, but necessary for the successful operation and completion of the installation. E. Work to be performed under this section shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Excavation, backfill and compaction for the fire system supply. 2. Automatic fire sprinkler systems. a. Wet pipe flow switch system. 1) Pipe and fittings. 2) Hangers and supports. 3) Earthquake bracing sprinkler heads. F. The following areas shall be furnished with an automatic fire protection system of type or types as required: 1. Areas of Renovation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 210000 - 2 1.2 RELATED WORK A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements of both the General and Special Conditions and the Mechanical Specification. 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The term jurisdictional authority used in this section of the specification shall include, as applicable, but not be limited to the following: 1. Local Building Department and Fire Department. 2. Insurance Services Office or Insuring Authority having jurisdiction. 3. Owner. B. The design and installation of all systems of fire protection shall conform to all requirements of applicable codes and publications herein defined: 1. International Building Code 2. International Fire Code 3. NFPA 13 4. NFPA 10 5. NFPA 17 6. NFPA 101 7. All State and local ordinances 8. Underwriters' Laboratories 9. Industrial Risk Insurers/Factory Mutual 10. American Society of Testing Materials 11. American National Standards Institute 12. Occupation 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The successful Contractor shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of this specification. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special Conditions of these specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals. B. Submit shop drawings (floor plans - detailed working drawings), showing dimensions, ducts, lights, or other items affecting the fire protection systems to jurisdictional agencies for review and approval, including all Authorities Having Jurisdiction (including, but not limited to the local Fire Marshall. All items identified in NFPA 13 for proper working drawings shall be complied with. The Architect or Engineer will reject all submittals not in compliance. Submit all necessary shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction. Concurrently, Electronic submittals shall be submitted to the Architect. After approval from jurisdictional agencies have been returned to the Contractor, they shall be submitted to the Architect for final acceptance. These final acceptance sets shall have all agencies’ stamps of review and acceptance. Where there is conflict between the Contract Drawings and/or Specifications, and the recommendations of the jurisdictional authorities, the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to bidding or be resolved at no cost to the Owner. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 210000 - 3 C. Architect and Engineer’s review will be for general location only. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to check his drawings for interference and to do shop fabrication from measurements taken at the job site. D. Work on the project shall not begin until plans have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. E. Electronic version of catalog information shall be submitted for approval for all materials provided. F. A charge of $50.00 per drawing will be charged for electronic drawings. G. The preparation of all shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be accomplished by a Registered Engineer, licensed in the State of Montana, if required by local authorities. At a minimum, work must be done by a NICET Level 3 technician. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall investigate the structural, mechanical, electrical, and finished conditions affecting the piping, and shall arrange the equipment accordingly; furnishing required fittings, offsets and accessories. Route fire protection piping to avoid interference with ductwork and drain piping. In the event it becomes necessary to make field changes in pipe locations due to building construction, the Contractor shall consult with the Architect before making any changes. Any such changes required shall be made without added cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper locations and type of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for fire protection work, and shall obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress to avoid delay of the work. C. The Contractor responsible to review site prior to bid. Add/Relocate heads to meet NFPA requirements for new ceiling/wall layouts. D. All fees and permits specifically required for fire protection work, not obtained by others as specified elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by this Contractor. E. All systems of fire protection shall be installed by a licensed (for the location of installation) Fire Protection Contractor, fully experienced in fire protection installation as specified herein. F. Fire Protection Contractors may be required to provide in writing, specific information as to successfully completed projects and references to show cause as to why they should be considered acceptable to the Architect. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. One approved set of drawings shall be maintained on the job at all times. B. One reproducible set of As-Built drawings shall be provided to the Architect upon completion of the work. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 210000 - 4 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Three (3) sets of operating and maintenance instructions shall be provided the Owner upon completion. Manuals shall include, as a minimum, the following: 1. As-Built Drawings 2. NFPA 25 3. Catalog cut sheets of all materials installed 4. Equipment maintenance manuals 1.8 TRAINING A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation of the systems. Instruction shall continue until the Owner is fully satisfied that he understands the operation of his system. 1.9 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall guarantee to the Owner in writing, all equipment and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the fire protection system has been placed in continuous service and has been accepted by all authorities having jurisdiction. B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall not be held responsible for improper or negligent maintenance by the Owner after operating and maintenance indoctrination has been given the Owner. END OF SECTION 210000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 1 SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The mechanical requirements are supplemental to the General Requirements of these Specifications. The Mechanical Sections shall apply to phases of the work specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of Mechanical Systems for this project. B. The work shall include all items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled in these specifications and the accompanying drawings. All material, equipment, and labor shall be furnished together with all incidental items required by good practice to provide the complete systems described. C. Examine and refer to all Architectural, Civil, Structural, Electrical, Utility, Landscape and Mechanical drawings and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the mechanical work. Inspect the building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof. D. See general requirements for listed Alternate Bids. Note alternates listed and include any changes in work and price required to meet the requirements of the respective alternate. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following Organizations: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Uniform Plumbing Code (VPC) 7. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 8. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 9. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 10. Uniform Mechanical Code (IMC) 11. International Building Code (IBC) 12. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company 13. Local and State Codes and Ordinances 14. SMACNA Seismic Manual ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 2 1.3 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall pay all fees and arrange for all permits required for work done under his contract and under his supervision by subcontract. B. All usage contracts between the Owner and the serving utilities company, such as membership and usage charges or fees, etc., for the purpose of obtaining the services for the utility company shall be applied for and paid for by the Owner. C. All permits and fees for connection to the utility, including inspection and staking costs imposed by the utility company or required for proper installation, and all necessary manholes, encasements, valves, service boxes, meters, meter housings or vaults complete as required by the utility company of jurisdictional agency, shall be applied for and paid by the Mechanical Contractor. D. Exception: The gas service from the main to and including the gas meter will be furnished and installed by the gas company and paid for by the Owner. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed must have prior approval. Written prior approval must be obtained from the Architect/Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid opening. Requests are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline to give ample time for examination. The items approved will be listed in an addendum and only this list of equipment will be accepted in lieu of specified products. Submittals must indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu of those specified, together with complete technical and comparative data on specified items and proposed items. See list of prior approved manufacturers at end of this section. B. Mechanical equipment may be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish, equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel. C. This Contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from damage as a result of his work. D. Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. E. This Contractor shall make the required arrangement with General Contractor for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. F. Store materials and equipment indoors at the job site or, if this is not possible, store on raised platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 3 1.5 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of piping and ductwork unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining lineal runs of piping or ductwork, nor shall they be used for shop drawings for piping and ductwork fabrication or ordering. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for resolution. 1.6 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a satisfactory and complete system in accordance with the intent of the drawing and specifications. Provide, at no extra cost, all incidental items required for completion of the work even though they are not specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. B. The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect the mechanical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Landscape and Electrical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the Contract. C. Location of mechanical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted and his decision shall govern. Necessary changes shall be made at the Contractor’s expense. D. Determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for the work, and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed. E. Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. F. Take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk. G. At all times during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. Make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 4 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to the work of their Contractors, to the building or its contents, people, etc. 1.7 REVIEW A. All work and material is subject to review at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not conform with these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. 1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. GENERAL 1. Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade, including work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike manner to present a neat and finished appearance. B. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 1. Provide all excavating and backfilling as required, with backfilling only after approval of the Architect. Backfill to be free of all debris and decayable matter. See Excavation and Backfill requirements in SECTION 312000 – EARTH MOVING. C. CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FRAMING 1. Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by this Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor and shall be repaired by skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at the Contractor’s expense. 2. Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, framing for equipment, provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they will be provided by this Contractor for his work. Whether chases, etc., are provided by this Contractor or others, this Contractor is responsible for correct size and locations. 1.9 COORDINATION A. This Contractor shall plan his work to proceed with a minimum interference with other trades and it shall be his responsibility to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building structure for installation of work, and to provide sleeves as required. Dimensions of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked in order that correct clearances and connections may be made. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 5 1.10 CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his work or employees. B. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris relative to his work and leave the premises, including tunnels, crawl spaces, and pipe chases in clean and orderly condition. Remove all dirt and debris from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. After construction is completed, wash all mechanical equipment. 1.11 DUST PROTECTION A. Contractor will provide suitable dust protection for all existing areas prior to beginning of cutting or demolition. Contractor will obtain approval of partition from Owner before proceeding with work involved in these rooms. 1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. OFFICES 1. Contractor may provide a temporary office for himself and for the periodic use by the Architect\Engineer. B. REMOVAL 1. Contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match adjacent areas. C. LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDS 1. The Contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. D. PROTECTION DEVICES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades, fences, signal lights, etc., required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for which the Owner may be held responsible because of lack of above items. E. TEMPORARY WATER 1. The Contractor shall provide all water required by his trade for construction. Temporary drinking water shall be provided by Contractor from a proven safe source dispensed by single service containers, until such time as the construction water outlet has been installed, disinfected, and approved for drinking purposes. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 6 F. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary first-aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. The Contractor shall provide general area fire extinguishers only. 1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide eight PDF Electronic Submittals (8) copies of manufacturer's literature and/or certified prints as soon as possible but within thirty (30) days after awarding of Contract, for items of materials, equipment, or systems where called for in specifications. Shop drawings and literature complete showing item used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough-in, etc., as required for complete check and installation. Manufacturers literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review. B. Each copy of each item submitted must be clearly marked as follows for purposes of identification and record. Submittals not marked (typewritten only) as described below will be rejected and returned without review. Date: Name of Project: Branch of Work: Submitted by: Specification or Plan Reference: C. Prior to their submission, each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the Contractor evidencing such checking will be rejected and returned without review. D. All submittals will be examined when submitted in proper form for compliance. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, for deviation from the contract Documents, nor for violation of sound safety practices. E. The Contractor shall keep in the field office one print of each submittal which has been reviewed and stamped by the Architect or Engineer. F. Submittals will be required for each item of material and equipment furnished as noted in specifications. G. Submittals which are incomplete relative to quality requirements, capacity, engineering data, dimensional data or detailed list of specialty or control equipment will be rejected. Lists shall include descriptive coding as specified or shown on drawings. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 7 THE ENGINEER WILL PERFORM SHOP DRAWING REVIEW OF EACH ITEM; HOWEVER, SUBSEQUENT REVIEW OF ITEMS PREVIOUSLY REJECTED WILL BE BILLED TO THE CONTRACTOR AT A RATE OF $100 PER HOUR. H. Schedule of Shop Drawings. 1. Piping 2. Valves 3. Pumps 4. Insulation I. Paper submittals shall be properly bound in a three-ring binder or equivalent method. Unbound submittals shall be returned without review. 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. At the time orders are placed for any item of equipment requiring service or operating maintenance, the Contractor shall request the manufacturer furnish three (3) copies of OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS for each piece of equipment. These shall be included in the brochure of equipment. 1.15 BROCHURE OF EQUIPMENT A. Upon completion of work, prepare three copies of "Brochure of Equipment" containing data pertinent to equipment and systems on job. Binders containing materials shall be one or more three ring binders of sufficient number to hold all literature. Contained in binders shall be: Installation, maintenance, and operating instructions for each piece of equipment; parts lists; wiring diagrams; one copy of each shop drawing and literature submittal; record drawings, etc. B. All literature shall be clean, unused and filed under divider headings corresponding to the specifications. C. These brochures shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and approved by him before authorization of final payment. 1.16 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all concealed or underground pipe or conduit runs and other equipment installed other than as shown on the drawings. Dimension underground lines from established building lines. Indicate all installed pull boxes in conduit runs. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all mechanical equipment, plumbing fixtures, piping, etc. The location of any item which deviates from the bid documents shall be accurately drawn and dimensioned. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 8 C. All underground piping shall be dimensioned from nearest column and/or exterior walls. The location of all maintenance related items such as duct access doors, fire dampers, isolation valves, filters, etc., shall be highlighted on as built drawing. 1.17 PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION A. At the completion of the work and at such time as the Owner shall direct, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor performing this work shall put into satisfactory operation the various systems installed under the specifications. At no additional cost to the Owner, furnish the services of a person completely familiar with the installations performed under this specification, to instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in the proper operation and servicing of the equipment and systems. These services shall be available for a period of no less than one (1) day. 1.18 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and labor installed are new and of first quality and that any material or labor found defective shall be replaced without cost to the Owner within one (1) year after substantial completion of the Contract or one (1) full season of heating and cooling operation, whichever is the greater. The guarantee shall list the date of the beginning of the one (1) year period, which shall be the date that the Substantial Completion Certificate is issued. B. Any damage to the building, caused by defective work or material of the Contractor within the above-mentioned period, shall be satisfactorily repaired without cost to the Owner. C. The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The Owner shall accept full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment immediately upon substantial completion and occupancy of the building. D. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are mounted in Equipment Rooms and Operating Personnel thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all mechanical equipment by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 220000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic hot/cold-water piping. 2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aeroflex USA, Inc. 2. Armacell LLC. 3. K-Flex USA. G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: H. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 2. Knauf Insulation. 3. Manson Insulation Inc. 4. Owens Corning. 5. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4 N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5 C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.6 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE System Pipe Size and Location Insulation Type and Thick- ness Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping Piping in Building 2-inches and smaller 1-inch fiberglass insulation with ASJ Vapor barrier jacket Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Piping Piping in Building 1-inch Fiberglass insula- tion with ASJ Vapor barrier jacket END OF SECTION 220719 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. System purging and disinfecting activities report. B. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. D. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2 2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Capitol Manufacturing Company. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Hart Industries International, Inc. e. Jomar Valve. f. Matco-Norca. g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. h. Wilkins. i. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. H. Install piping to permit valve servicing. I. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. J. Install piping free of sags and bends. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." D. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4 B. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. D. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. E. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod. G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.6 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 8 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. END OF SECTION 221116 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1 SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3 1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Froet Industries LLC. 4) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries. 5) Plastic Oddities. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4 c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. J. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." K. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5 L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. M. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. B. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. D. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. E. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod. G. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. H. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. D. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 7 C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U- tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. 3.7 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 8 and smaller shall be any of the following (if piping is located in a ceiling plenum, utilize cast iron piping only): ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 8 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following (If piping is located in a ceiling plenum, utilize cast iron piping only): 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 221316 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1 SECTION 230000 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The mechanical requirements are supplemental to the General Requirements of these Specifications. The Mechanical Sections shall apply to phases of the work specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of Mechanical Systems for this project. B. The work shall include all items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled in these specifications and the accompanying drawings. All material, equipment, and labor shall be furnished together with all incidental items required by good practice to provide the complete systems described. C. Examine and refer to all Architectural, Civil, Structural, Electrical, Utility, Landscape and Mechanical drawings and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the mechanical work. Inspect the building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof. D. See general requirements for listed Alternate Bids. Note alternates listed and include any changes in work and price required to meet the requirements of the respective alternate. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following Organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA) 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. International Plumbing Code 9. Uniform Plumbing Code 10. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 11. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 12. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 13. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 14. International Building Code (IBC) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2 15. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company 16. Local and State Codes and Ordinances 17. SMACNA Seismic Manual 1.3 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall pay all fees and arrange for all permits required for work done under his contract and under his supervision by subcontract. B. All usage contracts between the Owner and the serving utilities company, such as membership and usage charges or fees, etc., for the purpose of obtaining the services for the utility company shall be applied for and paid for by the Owner. C. All permits and fees for connection to the utility, including inspection and staking costs imposed by the utility company or required for proper installation, and all necessary manholes, encasements, valves, service boxes, meters, meter housings or vaults complete as required by the utility company of jurisdictional agency, shall be applied for and paid by the Mechanical Contractor. D. Exception: The gas service from the main to and including the gas meter will be furnished and installed by the gas company and paid for by the Owner. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed must have prior approval. Written prior approval must be obtained from the Architect/Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid opening. Requests are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline to give ample time for examination. The items approved will be listed in an addendum and only this list of equipment will be accepted in lieu of specified products. Submittals must indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu of those specified, together with complete technical and comparative data on specified items and proposed items. See list of prior approved manufacturers at end of this section. B. Mechanical equipment may be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish, equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel. C. This Contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from damage as a result of his work. D. Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. E. This Contractor shall make the required arrangement with General Contractor for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3 F. Store materials and equipment indoors at the job site or, if this is not possible, store on raised platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. 1.5 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of piping and ductwork unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining lineal runs of piping or ductwork, nor shall they be used for shop drawings for piping and ductwork fabrication or ordering. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for resolution. 1.6 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a satisfactory and complete system in accordance with the intent of the drawing and specifications. Provide, at no extra cost, all incidental items required for completion of the work even though they are not specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. B. The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect the mechanical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Landscape and Electrical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the Contract. C. Location of mechanical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted and his decision shall govern. Necessary changes shall be made at the Contractor’s expense. D. Determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for the work, and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed. E. Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. F. Take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk. G. At all times during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. Make good any damage, injury or ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 4 loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to the work of their Contractors, to the building or its contents, people, etc. 1.7 REVIEW A. All work and material is subject to review at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not conform with these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. 1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. GENERAL 1. Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade, including work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike manner to present a neat and finished appearance. B. CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FRAMING 1. Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by this Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor and shall be repaired by skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at the Contractor’s expense. 2. Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, framing for equipment, provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they will be provided by this Contractor for his work. Whether chases, etc., are provided by this Contractor or others, this Contractor is responsible for correct size and locations. 1.9 COORDINATION A. This Contractor shall plan his work to proceed with a minimum interference with other trades and it shall be his responsibility to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building structure for installation of work, and to provide sleeves as required. Dimensions of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked in order that correct clearances and connections may be made. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 5 1.10 CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his work or employees. B. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris relative to his work and leave the premises, including tunnels, crawl spaces, and pipe chases in clean and orderly condition. Remove all dirt and debris from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. After construction is completed, wash all mechanical equipment. 1.11 DUST PROTECTION A. Contractor will provide suitable dust protection for all existing areas prior to beginning of cutting or demolition. Contractor will obtain approval of partition from Owner before proceeding with work involved in these rooms. 1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. OFFICES 1. Contractor shall provide a temporary office for himself and for the periodic use by the Architect\Engineer including: a. Lights, heat, and telephone. (Pay telephone not permitted.) B. REMOVAL 1. Contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match adjacent areas. C. LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDS 1. The Contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. D. PROTECTION DEVICES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades, fences, signal lights, etc., required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for which the Owner may be held responsible because of lack of above items. E. TEMPORARY WATER 1. The Contractor shall provide all water required by his trade for construction. Temporary drinking water shall be provided by Contractor from a proven safe ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 6 source dispensed by single service containers, until such time as the construction water outlet has been installed, disinfected, and approved for drinking purposes. F. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary first-aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. The Contractor shall provide general area fire extinguishers only. 1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide eight (8) copies (Electronic PDF Acceptable) of manufacturer's literature and/or certified prints as soon as possible but within thirty (30) days after awarding of Contract, for items of materials, equipment, or systems where called for in specifications. Shop drawings and literature complete showing item used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough-in, etc., as required for complete check and installation. Manufacturers literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review. B. Each copy of each item submitted must be clearly marked as follows for purposes of identification and record. Submittals not marked (typewritten only) as described below will be rejected and returned without review. Date: Name of Project: Branch of Work: Submitted by: Specification of Plan Reference: C. Prior to their submission, each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the Contractor evidencing such checking will be rejected and returned without review. D. All submittals will be examined when submitted in proper form for compliance. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, for deviation from the contract Documents, nor for violation of sound safety practices. E. The Contractor shall keep in the field office one print of each submittal which has been reviewed and stamped by the Architect or Engineer. F. Submittals will be required for each item of material and equipment furnished as noted in specifications. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 7 G. Submittals which are incomplete relative to quality requirements, capacity, engineering data, dimensional data or detailed list of specialty or control equipment will be rejected. Lists shall include descriptive coding as specified or shown on drawings. THE ENGINEER WILL PERFORM SHOP DRAWING REVIEW OF EACH ITEM; HOWEVER, SUBSEQUENT REVIEW OF ITEMS PREVIOUSLY REJECTED WILL BE BILLED TO THE CONTRACTOR AT A RATE OF $75 PER HOUR. H. Schedule of Shop Drawings. 1. Diffusers, grilles, louvers 2. Air distribution accessories I. Submittals shall be properly bound in a three-ring binder or equivalent method. Unbound submittals shall be returned without review. 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. At the time orders are placed for any item of equipment requiring service or operating maintenance, the Contractor shall request the manufacturer furnish three (3) copies of OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS for each piece of equipment. These shall be included in the brochure of equipment. 1.15 BROCHURE OF EQUIPMENT A. Upon completion of work, prepare three copies of "Brochure of Equipment" containing data pertinent to equipment and systems on job. Binders containing materials shall be one or more three ring binders of sufficient number to hold all literature. Contained in binders shall be: Installation, maintenance, and operating instructions for each piece of equipment; parts lists; wiring diagrams; one copy of each shop drawing and literature submittal; record drawings, etc. B. All literature shall be clean, unused and filed under divider headings corresponding to the specifications. C. These brochures shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and approved by him before authorization of final payment. 1.16 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all concealed or underground pipe or conduit runs and other equipment installed other than as shown on the drawings. Dimension underground lines from established building lines. Indicate all installed pull boxes in conduit runs. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all mechanical equipment, plumbing fixtures, piping, ductwork, diffusers, ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 8 grilles, etc. The location of any item which deviates from the bid documents shall be accurately drawn and dimensioned. C. All underground piping and ductwork shall be dimensioned from nearest column and/or exterior walls. The location of all maintenance related items such as duct access doors, fire dampers, isolation valves, filters, etc., shall be highlighted on as built drawing. 1.17 PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION A. At the completion of the work and at such time as the Owner shall direct, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor performing this work shall put into satisfactory operation the various systems installed under the specifications. At no additional cost to the Owner, furnish the services of a person completely familiar with the installations performed under this specification, to instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in the proper operation and servicing of the equipment and systems. These services shall be available for a period of no less than one (1) day. 1.18 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and labor installed are new and of first quality and that any material or labor found defective shall be replaced without cost to the Owner within one (1) year after substantial completion of the Contract or one (1) full season of heating and cooling operation, whichever is the greater. The guarantee shall list the date of the beginning of the one (1) year period, which shall be the date that the Substantial Completion Certificate is issued. B. Any damage to the building, caused by defective work or material of the Contractor within the above-mentioned period, shall be satisfactorily repaired without cost to the Owner. C. The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The Owner shall accept full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment immediately upon substantial completion and occupancy of the building. D. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are mounted in Equipment Rooms and Operating Personnel thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all mechanical equipment by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 230000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certified TAB reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." G. RGO is approved balancing agent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Balancing is limited to providing initial reading and rebalancing remodel areas with assistance from Engineer. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.4 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 3.5 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 230593 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. 2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. B. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating. C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips. D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. 3.2 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 5. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. 7. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 8. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators. E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service. F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy- duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. B. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: . D. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1 SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 3. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 4. Face Style: Four cone. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2 B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 1 SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical requirements are supplemental to the General and Supplementary Conditions and the General Requirements of these Specifications. The Electrical Sections shall apply to phases of the work specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of Electrical Systems for this project. B. The work shall include all items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled in these specifications and the accompanying drawings. All material, equipment and labor shall be furnished together with all incidental items required by good practice to provide the complete systems described. C. Examine and refer to all Architectural, Structural, Utility, Landscape and Mechanical drawings and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the electrical work. Inspect the building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof. D. See general requirements for listed Alternate Bids. Note alternates listed and include any changes in work and price required to meet the requirements of the respective alternate. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following organizations: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 3. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) 4. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 5. Independent Testing Laboratories (ITL) 6. International Building Code (IBC) 7. National Electrical Code (NEC) Latest Edition 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 11. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 12. Rules and Regulations of the State Fire Marshal 13. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company 14. Local and State Codes and Ordinances ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 2 1.3 FEES AND PERMITS A. The electrical contractor shall pay all fees and arrange for all permits required for work done under his contract and under his supervision by subcontract. B. Cost of primary work noted to be by Utility Company not to be included in Contractor's Bid. All charges made by the Utility Company for their part of the primary work will be billed directly to the Owner and paid for by the Owner. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer's trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed must have prior approval. Written prior approval must be obtained from the Architect/Engineer ten (10) business days prior to bid opening. Requests are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline to give ample time for examination. The items approved will be listed in an addendum and only this list of equipment will be accepted in lieu of specified products. Submittals must indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu of those specified, together with complete technical and comparative data on specified items and proposed items. B. Electrical equipment shall be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish, equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from damage as a result of his work. D. Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. E. The electrical contractor shall make the required arrangement with General Contractor for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. F. Materials and equipment shall be stored indoors at the job site or, if this is not possible, stored on raised platforms and protected from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. G. Lighting fixtures proposed as substitutes to those specified must have prior approval by Architect/Engineer as noted above. Approval will not be considered unless the request has all of the following information: 1. Manufacturers data showing catalog number. 2. Construction details. 3. Photometrics. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 3 4. Recommended maintenance factor. 1.5 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of conduit unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining quantities or lineal runs of conduit. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for resolution. 1.6 RESPONSIBILITY A. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the installation of satisfactory and complete systems in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications and shall provide, at no extra cost, all incidental items required for completion of the work even though they are not specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. B. The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect the electrical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Structural, Landscape and Mechanical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the Contract. C. Location of electrical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted and his decision shall govern. Necessary changes shall be made at no additional expense to the Architect/Engineer or Owner. D. The electrical contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves and other openings in the construction required for the work, and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed. Roughing-in fixtures, etc., must be laid out accurately. Connections to equipment of the same class shall be equal heights, plumb, and at right angles to the wall, unless otherwise directed. E. Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. F. The electrical contractor shall take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk. G. At all times during the performance of this contract, the electrical contractor shall properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. The contractor shall make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 4 be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. The electrical contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. The electrical contractor shall provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions. H. Circuiting and switching shall be exactly as shown on drawings. Combining of home runs is acceptable but neutrals shall not be shared. Contractor shall refer to NEC Article 310-15 and adjust accordingly. Combining of wiring of various systems in conduit runs is not acceptable unless otherwise specified herein or noted on drawings. I. Neutrals shall not be shared to avoid the requirement of installing handle-ties on breakers. J. Contractor is responsible for providing UL-listed fire rated materials where required by applicable codes and other sections of this specification to seal fire-rated membrane penetrations. In particular this applies to requirements of IBC Section 712 as it pertains to: 1. Electrical Boxes: Provide minimum 6 inch separation in non-rated walls. Provide minimum 24 inch horizontal separation in fire rated walls. In rated walls locate boxes so as to comply with IBC Section 712 separation and membrane penetration requirements. Apply fire-rated putty pads (SpecSeal Series SSP Intumescent Putty Pads, or equal) to all boxes where 24” box-to-box separation cannot be maintained or where openings exceed allowable limits under IBC section 712. 2. Flush-Mounted Panels (panelboards, fire alarm panels and any other flush- mounted electrical enclosure exceeding 16 square inches of area): Coordinate with the general contractor for gypsum board lined framing pockets where any flush-mounted panelboards are located in 1 or 2-hour rated walls. Provide fire- rated putty pads on top and bottom of panelboards to seal around conduits. 3. Conduit and Cable: Apply fire seal where conduit or cables penetrate fire-rated assemblies as required by NEC Article 300-21 and IBC section 712. Fire seal shall be equal to International Protective Coating Corp. #FSC or #FS series or Chase Technology Corp. #PR-855 Fire Stop. 1.7 INSPECTION A. All work and material is subject to inspection at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not conform with these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. GENERAL ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 5 1. Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade conducting all work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike manner to present a neat and finished appearance. B. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 1. Provide all excavating and backfilling as required, with backfilling only after approval of the Architect. Backfill to be free of all debris and decayable matter. See Excavation and Backfill requirements in DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. C. CUTTING, PATCHING AND FRAMING 1. Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by this Contractor shall be the responsibility of this Contractor and shall be repaired by skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at no additional expense to the Owner. D. Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, and framing for equipment are provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they will be provided by this contractor for his work. Whether chases, etc., are provided by this contractor or others, this contractor is responsible for correct size and locations. 1.9 COORDINATION A. The electrical contractor shall plan his work to proceed with a minimum interference with other trades and it shall be his responsibility to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building structure for installation of work, and to provide sleeves as required. Dimensions of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked in order that correct clearances and connections may be made. 1.10 CLEAN UP A. The electrical contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by his work or employees. B. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris relative to his work and leave the premises, including tunnels, crawl spaces, and pipe chases in clean and orderly condition. Remove all dirt and debris from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. After construction is completed, wash all light fixtures and lamps, remove all labels from fixture lenses. 1.11 DUST PROTECTION A. Contractor will provide suitable dust protection for all existing areas prior to beginning of cutting or demolition. Contractor will obtain approval of partition from Owner before proceeding with work involved in these rooms. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 6 1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. OFFICES 1. The electrical contractor shall provide temporary offices for himself including lights, heat and telephone, if required. B. REMOVAL 1. The electrical contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match adjacent areas. C. LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDS 1. The electrical contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the contractor. D. PROTECTION DEVICES 1. The electrical contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades, fences, signal lights, etc. required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the contractor. The contractor shall assume all responsibility for which the owner may be held responsible because of lack of above items. E. TEMPORARY WATER 1. The electrical contractor shall provide all water required by his trade for construction. Temporary drinking water shall be provided from a proven safe source dispensed by single service containers, until such time as the construction water outlet has been install, disinfected and approved for drinking purposes. F. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1. The electrical contractor shall provide all necessary first-aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. The contractor shall provide general area fire extinguishers only. 1.13 ALTERATIONS A. In alteration, extension and remodeling projects, existing conduits shall be extended, altered or reconnected as required. Where existing conduits which are indicated to be revised, or which will be essential to the functioning of the particular system, are cut or exposed due to construction changes, new connections shall be made in the most ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 7 expeditious manner as directed or indicated by the Owner. Where wiring is involved, new wires shall be pulled in between the nearest available, accessible, reused outlets. In all cases where new wires are required, indicated or specified to be installed in existing conduits, if same cannot be installed, new conduits shall be provided. Attention is called to the fact that all new conduit, wiring and apparatus shown on drawings or specified shall be connected to the existing systems so as to function as complete units. All conduits and electrical apparatus, etc., in place and not shown or specified to be reused or which will not be essential to the functioning of the various systems when the work is complete, shall be removed and stored where directed. No old material shall be reinstalled or reused unless otherwise indicated on drawings or herein specified. Concealed conduits which are not indicated or specified to be reused and become exposed due to construction changes shall be removed to the nearest available, accessible, reused outlets. B. Provide temporary power feeds, temporary light switching and any other temporary measures required to support systems that cannot be completed due to the phased nature of the project. For example in the case of a corridor that spans several phases provide temporary switching for completed phases of corridor lighting until all phases can be completed and final switching installed. 1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide eight (8) copies of manufacturer's literature and/or certified prints as soon as possible but within thirty (30) days after awarding of Contract, for items of materials, equipment, or systems where called for in specifications. Shop drawings and literature complete showing item used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough-in, etc., as required for complete check and installation. Manufacturer’s literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review. B. Each copy of each item submitted must be clearly marked as follows for purposes of identification and record. Submittals not marked (typewritten only) as described below will be rejected and returned without review. Date: Name of Project: Branch of Work: Submitted by: Specification or Plan Reference: C. Prior to their submission, each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the contractor for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the contractor evidencing such checking will be rejected and returned without review. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 8 D. All submittals will be examined when submitted in proper form for compliance. Such review shall not relieve the contractor of responsibility for errors, for deviation from the contract Documents, nor for violation of sound safety practices. E. The contractor shall keep in the field office one print of each submittal which has been reviewed and stamped by the Architect or Engineer. F. Submittals will be required for each item of material and equipment furnished as noted in specifications. G. All submittals shall be organized into a single binder and transmitted in one delivery. Transmittal of individual sections is not permitted. Exceptions will be considered upon request for exceptionally long-lead equipment or voluminous submittals that cannot reasonably fit into a single binder. H. Submittals which are incomplete relative to quality requirements, capacity, engineering data, dimensional data or detailed list of specialty or control equipment will be rejected. Lists shall include descriptive coding as specified or shown on drawings. THE ENGINEER WILL PERFORM SHOP DRAWING REVIEW OF EACH ITEM, HOWEVER, SUBSEQUENT REVIEW OF ITEMS PREVIOUSLY REJECTED WILL BE BILLED TO THE CONTRACTOR AT A RATE OF $75 PER HOUR. I. Schedule of Shop Drawings. ITEM MFG LIT SHOP DWG WIRING DIAG. O&M BOOK RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS X WIRE AND CABLE X OUTLET BOXES X WIRING DEVICES X FIRE SEAL PRODUCTS (see specifications 260533) X SUPPORTING DEVICES X FUSES X DISCONNECT SWITCHES X PANELBOARDS X X MOTOR CONTROLS X LIGHTING FIXTURES X FIRE ALARM SYSTEM X X X X ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 9 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. At the time orders are placed for any item of equipment requiring service or operating maintenance, the contractor shall request the manufacturer furnish three (3) copies of OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS for each piece of equipment. These shall be included in the brochure of equipment. 1.16 BROCHURE OF EQUIPMENT A. Upon completion of work, prepare a "Brochure of Equipment" containing data pertinent to equipment and systems on job. Binders containing materials shall be one or more three ring binders of sufficient number to hold all literature. Contained in binders shall be: Installation, maintenance, and operating instructions for each piece of equipment; parts lists; wiring diagrams; one copy of each shop drawing and literature submittal; record drawings, etc. B. All literature shall be clean, unused and filed under divider headings corresponding to the specifications. C. These brochures shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and approved by him before authorization of final payment. 1.17 "AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS A. The electrical contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a red line marked print set of drawings, each sheet stamped as the "As-Built" drawing and bearing the contractor's name, date and signature. The As-Built drawing shall show the location of all concealed or underground conduit runs and other equipment, devices, outlets, etc., installed other than as shown on the drawings. Dimension underground lines from established building lines. As-Built drawings to be developed from a job site record drawing set and shall be clean, neat and all changes legible and shown in the same format and symbols used on the contract drawings. The As-Built drawing set shall be submitted to the architect/engineer for approval, and any deficiencies noted by the architect/engineer corrected and resubmitted until approved by the architect/engineer at no cost to architect/engineer or owner. 1.18 PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION A. At the completion of the work and at such time as the Owner shall direct, prior to final acceptance, the electrical contractor performing this work shall put into satisfactory operation the various systems installed under the specifications. At no additional cost to the Owner, furnish the services of a person completely familiar with the installations performed under this specification, to instruct the Owners operating personnel in the proper operation and servicing of the equipment and systems. These services shall be available for a period of no less than one (1) day. B. Upon placing systems in operation the contractor shall measure phase currents at each main and branch panel within the facility, including existing panels, and balance ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 10 the phase currents to within 20% of each other by moving circuit breakers to different phases. 1.19 GUARANTEE-WARRANTY A. The electrical contractor shall and hereby does warrant and guarantee that all work executed under this Division will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of this work and that he will, at his own expense, repair and/or replace all such defective materials and work and all other work damaged thereby which becomes defective during the term of warranty, except that lamps and tubes shall be his responsibility only for normal lamp life or one year, whichever occurs first. END OF SECTION 260000 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 SECTION 260519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable (Type AC), metal-clad cable (Type MC) with ground wire. D. Aluminum conductors not permitted. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” 2.4 SLEEVE SEALS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a product by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Size and material per feeder schedule on plans. All conductors copper unless otherwise noted on plans. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. All conductors 75°C (167°F) unless otherwise noted on plans. B. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. C. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; Armored cable, Type AC; or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. J. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or power-limited tray cable, in cable tray. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least EIGHT inches of slack. J. Install separate neutral conductor for all single phase circuits to avoid the requirement of NEC 210.4 for handle-ties on multi-wire branch circuits. No shared neutrals. 3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Fire-Rated Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 J. K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test all service entrance, switchboard, panelboard, motor or equipment feeder conductors larger than #6 AWG for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6 b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Provide equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads imposed with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the necessary force. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for all proposed materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Do not use wooden materials for support, anchorage or attachment components unless the facility is framed of wooden materials. B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized or painted. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-plated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 40 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single or two-bolt conduit clamps. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lbs. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. Use washers. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, floor-boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For boxes, surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. IMC: ANSI C80.6. C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 1. Not permitted for use as a low voltage raceway, such as serving tel/data rough-ins. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all types and flexible and liquid-tight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Nonmetallic conduit or tubing is not permitted above-grade under any circumstance in plenums unless specifically noted on plans. B. ENT: NEMA TC 13. C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC unless otherwise indicated. D. LFNC: UL 1660. E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12, or 3R, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, screw-cover type, or flanged-and-gasketed type as necessary or as indicated on plans. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Permitted only in utility spaces (mechanical or electrical rooms, crawl spaces, data closets), or where indicated on plans or with written permission from the Architect. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company. c. Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Provide 2-1/8” x 4” square boxes with mud ring for wall-mounted boxes and 2-1/8” x 4” octagonal boxes for fixture outlets. B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Not permitted. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Provide backplate. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Not permitted unless noted on plans. G. Floor Boxes: 1. Floor boxes shall be of die-cast aluminum construction, suited for concrete floors. Boxes shall be equal to Carlon E976RFB, ganged as indicated on plans. Provide brass cover. Provide E976AK2 activation kit for each gang. 2. In slab-on-grade construction provide a dedicated 1” conduit from an accessible ceiling space to each floorbox intended for tel/data use. This is in addition to the power conduit required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: EMT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, as identified on plans. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, as identified on plans. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R unless noted otherwise on plans. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Loading docks. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT (see also specification 260519 for permitted uses of AC and MC cable). 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: EMT. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic in damp or wet locations. See plans for specific enclosure or box specifications. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. ½-inch is acceptable only where specifically noted on plans or other specifications. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section 206529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. 4. Where PVC under-slab conduit is used for Critical and Life Safety branch feeders for hospitals, use schedule 80 per NEC 517.30 (C) (3) (1). I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. J. Install pull wires in ALL empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 24 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. K. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. L. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change. 2. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit or pre-wired fixture whips for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. O. Support all wall-mounted receptacle boxes with B-Line BB8 (or equal) mounting brackets or BB4 (or equal) box support brackets that secure on both sides to a steel stud. Brackets that secure on a single side, such as B-Line BB4 or BB5 series, may be used for switches but are not acceptable for receptacles. Do not use materials not specifically intended for the purpose such as scrap EMT and tie-wraps. P. Mark all junction boxes with panel and circuit numbers. Mark boxes of emergency systems as required by NEC 700.9. Use indelible ink. Q. Do not install boxes back to back in walls, Provide minimum 6 inch separation in non- rated walls. Provide minimum 24 inch horizontal separation in fire rated walls. In rated walls locate boxes so as to comply with IBC Section 712 separation and membrane penetration requirements. Apply fire-rated putty pads (SpecSeal Series SSP Intumescent Putty Pads, or equal) to all boxes where 24” box-to-box separation cannot be maintained or where openings exceed allowable limits under IBC section 712. R. Wherever receptacles are shown adjacent to tel/data, video or other low voltage locations, install boxes side-by-side using dual mounting brackets such as B-Line BB8 series for a consistent distance separating the boxes of no more than 3” between adjacent faceplates. Provide or coordinate additional framing as required. S. Coordinate all device locations with architectural elevations and other plans before rough-in. Adjust device locations to accommodate casework elevations or knee-space locations or any other architectural or other trade obstruction. Contact the architect or engineer if any conflicts are present that cannot be resolved without substantially changing the layout of devices. The contractor shall be responsible to relocate any devices that are improperly coordinated. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 260533 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. E. Fasteners for Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. F. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES". 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label. B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in all panels, switchboards, enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay or self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2- inch high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw attachment. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. All labels to include equipment tag (e.g. HWP-1), equipment description (e.g. HOT WATER PUMP 1), voltage and phase (e.g. 208V 3-Ø), and panel and circuit number of source (e.g. 1N1L-23/25/27). e. All labels shall be black letters on white background. Use red letters onwhite background for any equipment fed from an emergency (generator or UPS) power source. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. c. Transformers. d. Motor-control centers. e. Disconnect switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Motor starters. h. Push-button stations. i. Power transfer equipment. j. Contactors. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors in all cases where the insulation of the wire is not color coded. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Purple. c. Phase C: Yellow. END OF SECTION 260553 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall Switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device Plates and Box Covers. D. Dimmers. E. Occupancy Sensors 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Wire and Cable Section 260519 B. Outlet Boxes Section 260533 C. Floor Boxes Section 260533 D. Lighting Section 265100 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. All devices shall be UL listed. 1.4 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data as required. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturers instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). B. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 C. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). D. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). E. General Electric F. Lithonia 2.2 COLORS A. All devices and cover plate colors shall be WHITE/IVORY/SELECTED BY ARCHITECT except as noted under DEVICE PLATES AND BOX COVERS. 2.3 WALL SWITCHES A. In all finished spaces: 1. Specification Grade AC Toggle Switch, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, clamp type, screw terminal, side or back wired: a. Single Pole, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series b. Double Pole, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series c. Three-way, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series d. Four-way, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series B. In mechanical/electrical equipment rooms, maintenance areas, janitor rooms, crawl spaces and other high abuse areas ONLY: 1. Specification Grade AC Toggle Switch, 20 ampere, 120-277 volt, clamp type, screw terminal, side or back wired: a. Single Pole, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series b. Double Pole, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series c. Three-way, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series d. Four-way, 20 ampere Hubbell CSB Series C. Where shown on plans: 1. Pilot Light Switch, 20 ampere, light on with load on: a. SPST, 20 ampere, 120V, w/ pilot light Hubbell HBL1221 PL 2. Fused Switches: a. Box cover units with switch and plug fuse holder Bussman SSU, SSW, SSY Provide fuse sized for load 3. Keyed Switches: a. Lock-Type, chrome lock dome Leviton 1221-2KL ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 Provide FOUR keys to Owner 2.4 DIMMERS A. Incandescent: Leviton Mural L/S (Level Set) Decora Style Preset Digital Dimmer, 1000-watt. B. Fluorescent: Leviton Mural L/S (Level Set) Decora Style 450-watt Preset Digital Dimmer for use with Advance Mark X dimming ballasts. Provide Leviton PE200-10W power extender if noted on plans. Install all power extenders in concealed location. C. Electronic Low Voltage: Leviton Mural L/S (Level Set) Decora Style 260-watt Preset Digital Dimmer for use with electronic low voltage power supplies. CONFIRM COMPATIBILITY WITH LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING SUPPLIER AND PROVIDE ALTERNATE DIMMER IF NECESSARY (SUBJECT TO APPROVAL OF ENGINEER). D. All dimmers shall be of same manufacturer and style and shall be identical in appearance and function regardless of load type being dimmed. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. In all finished spaces: 1. Style Line, Specification Grade, 20 ampere, 120 volt, clamp type, screw terminal, side or back wired. a. Duplex, 20 ampere, 125V (NEMA 5-20R) Hubbell HBL 5352A Series b. Duplex, ground fault interrupter, 20 ampere, (NEMA 5-20R), Hubbell GF20 Series c. Isolated Ground Receptacle, 20 ampere, (NEMA 5-20R) Hubbell No IG5352 Series B. In mechanical/electrical equipment rooms, maintenance areas, janitor rooms, crawl spaces and other high abuse areas ONLY: 1. Duplex Receptacles, Specification Grade, Compact, Flush, Nylon Face, clamp type, screw terminal, side or back wired: a. Duplex, 20 ampere, 125V (NEMA 5-20R) Hubbell HBL BR20 Series C. All outdoor receptacles shall be rated and labeled “WEATHER RESISTANT” REFER TO THE DRAWINGS FOR OTHER OUTLETS REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Television Outlet Leviton 80781 Series ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 2.7 DEVICE PLATES AND BOX COVERS A. In all rooms with finished, painted gypboard walls: 1. Smooth High Impact Nylon Hubbell P Series Smooth High Impact Nylon, Style Line Hubbell HPS Series Recept Plate, weatherproof “while in-use” Hubbell No. WP Series B. Note special plates specified herein or on the drawing. Substitute materials must have sample submitted for approval. C. Device plates for thirty ampere and larger outlets shall be No. 302 /No. 430 stainless steel and suitable for the wiring device used. D. All plates in mechanical/electrical equipment rooms, maintenance areas, janitor rooms, crawl spaces and other high abuse areas shall be as follows: 1. Where devices are surface-mounted and conduit is exposed use ½” deep galvanized box covers, Steel City RS Series, or equal. 2. Where devices are flush use anodized aluminum plates, Hubbell A Series, or equal. 2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Ceiling Mounted 1. Combination ultrasonic and passive infrared motion detector, ceiling-mounted, self- adjusting, available with coverage of 500, 1000 and 2000 sq-ft. Select appropriate coverage for room served. Provide power packs as required. Leviton ODC Series or equal. B. Wall-Mounted 1. Infrared occupancy sensor, self –adjusting, 180 degree field of view, 2100 square feet of coverage. Select appropriate wattage rating for load served. Leviton Decora ODS Series, or equal. 2. Where indicated on plans provide Leviton Decora ODS0D-ID, or equal, with automatic switching for two separate lighting loads. C. Installation 1. Set all occupancy sensors to maximum delay (typically 30 minutes). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install wiring devices as shown on the contract drawings and as specified herein. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 B. Install wiring devices plumb with walls so that device plates are tight to finish surfaces. C. Device plates in finished areas and on painted walls shall be smooth high-impact nylon. D. Device plates in mechanical and electrical rooms, mounted on exposed boxes shall be galvanized steel. E. Dimmers shall not be ganged, unless otherwise noted on the plans. Install with a minimum of 6 inches between dimmers. Do not remove cooling fins. F. Run equipment grounding wire from isolated receptacle ground terminal to main service panel ground. Isolate this conductor from all other interim grounding points. G. Wiring devices shall be minimum 20 ampere in all areas, unless noted otherwise herein or on the contract drawings. H. GFCI receptacles shall not be utilized for feed thru function to protect downstream devices. Each GFCI device as shown on plan shall dedicated to server location where shown only. 3.2 DEVICE HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS A. Mount wiring devices at heights above finished floor as noted below or as shown on the contract drawings: 1. Convenience Receptacles 18 inches to center 2. Switches/Dimmers 44 inches to center 3. Telephone/Data/TV 18 inches to center 4. Telephone (wall-mounted) 44 inches to center 5. Fire Alarm Notification Appliances Top of appliance 6” below ceiling or 80” above floor, whichever is lower 6. Fire Alarm Pull Stations 44 inches to center 7. Thermostats 48 inches to center 8. Clocks as noted on drawings B. Coordinate all device locations with architectural elevations and other plans before rough- in. Adjust device locations to accommodate casework elevations or knee-space locations or any other architectural or other trade obstruction. Contact the architect or engineer if any conflicts are present that cannot be resolved without substantially changing the layout of devices. The contractor shall be responsible to relocate any devices that are improperly coordinated. C. Wherever receptacles are shown adjacent to tel/data, video or other low voltage locations, even if on separate plans, install boxes side-by-side with a consistent distance separating the boxes of no more than 3” between adjacent faceplates. Provide or coordinate additional framing as required. END OF SECTION 262726 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1 SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers specified on Light Fixture Schedule. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. F. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is specified. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 BALLASTS A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant or programmed-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi- level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. BF: 0.95 or higher. 5. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. B. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Not acceptable. C. Ballasts for Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. D. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type, as specified on Light Fixture Schedule. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 1. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. E. Ballasts for bi-Level or step-dimmed controlled lighting fixtures with linear fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. F. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. G. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type, as specified on Light Fixture Schedule. C 1. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. H. Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. Remote-style only if specified on Light Fixture Schedule. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4 a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. I. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. J. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 6. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS 1. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.6 LAMPS A. Provide lamps as specified on Light Fixture Schedule B. Furnish spare lamps identical to those installed in each fixture. Quantity: 20% of total lamps used or a minimum of three (3) lamps of each type, whichever is greater. C. Furnish spare ballasts identical to those used in each fixture. Quantity: 1 ballast or 6% of each fixture type, whichever is greater. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing or equal or better by manufacturer with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes or equal or better by manufacturer with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge or equal or better by manufacturer. E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to satisfaction of owner. E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." F. Organize and execute a 100-hour, uninterrupted burn-in period for all fluorescent luminaries. Luminaires shall be installed in final location prior to burn-in. G. Re-lamp all luminaries used for construction purposes at completion of project for final acceptance. H. Align luminaries and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of Project. Clean paint splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaries. Replace any dented, scratched, soiled or cracked lens or other fixture parts. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265100 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 1 SECTION 271500 - VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide and install independent voice and data wiring systems complying with the provisions of the latest National Electrical Code (NEC), any state and local codes, and this specification. Installation shall be done by a certified installer. B. This system shall include telecommunications closet equipment, horizontal cabling, terminations, interfaces and testing and shall include all cabling, jacks, connecting hardware, grounding, conduit, protective devices, and other items as specified. C. The system shall be complete and functional from workstation to patch panel for data cabling, and from workstation to termination blocks for voice wiring. The system shall include multi-pair telephone cables per the plans, including termination onto termination blocks in new data closets. D. Refer to plans for requirements and details in addition to this specification. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements of both the General and Special Conditions and the Electrical Specification. 1.3 WORK BY OTHERS A. The Owner will provide all powered network equipment (hubs, switches, routers, etc.) and all telephone equipment (keysets, keyset cords, etc.). B. The Owner will provide and install all backbone cabling linking new data closets to existing. C. The Owner will provide all patch cords. D. The Owner will arrange for termination of all voice cables in Owner’s PBX room. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All materials shall comply with the applicable sections of the following Codes for installation of telecommunications cabling: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 2. National Electrical Code (NEC/NFPA 70) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 2 3. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC IEEE C 2) 4. Local Codes, amendments, and ordinances. B. All materials and installation practices shall comply with the applicable sections of the following Telecommunications Industry Standards: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-2001, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-2001, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-2000, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1: Transmission Performance Specification for 4-Pair 100 Ω Category 6 Cabling (Standard). 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-2001 (Including 5 addendums), Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 6. ANSI/EIA/TIA-570-1991, Residential and Light Commercial Telecommunications Wiring Standard 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-1993, The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications infrastructure of Commercial Building 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-1994, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The successful Contractor shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of this specification. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special Conditions of these specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals. B. Architect's review will be for general location only. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to check his drawings for interferences and to do shop fabrication from measurements taken at the job site. C. Work on the project shall not begin until submittals have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Submittals shall include full catalog information for all materials submitted for approval to include manufacturer’s data of: 1. Racks, patch panels, wiring blocks and accessories. 2. Wall outlets. 3. Cables 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting the work, and shall arrange the equipment accordingly; furnishing required fittings, offsets and accessories. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 3 1.7 TRAINING A. The data system contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation of the systems if required by the Owner. Instruction shall continue until the Owner is fully satisfied that he understands the operation of the system. 1.8 CONTRACTOR EXPERIENCE A. The contractor shall be trained and certified in the installation of Cat-6 and Cat-5e systems by a major data equipment supplier such as Leviton. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment furnished and installed shall be of the highest quality, new, and meet the standards of EIA/TIA, FDDI, IEEE, UL, NFPA, and NEC and shall bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available. B. Materials referred to by trade name, make, or catalog number shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality. Substitutions of equal quality can be made by submitting prior approval. C. Manufacturers: 1. Siemon 2. Anixter 3. Panduit 4. Chatsworth 5. Hubbell 6. Bicc General 7. Commscope 8. Amp 9. Leviton 10. Berktek 11. Belden 12. Others by prior approval only. 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards, as identified on the plans, for the tel/data room termination devices shall be 3/4 in thick, type ACX fire retardant plywood, or painted with fire retardant paint, covering an area 4 x 4 ft, as noted on drawings. Backboards shall be mounted 36” above the finished floor. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 4 2.3 COPPER WIRE AND CABLES A. Horizontal Data Cabling - All building data cable shall consist of listed, category 6, non- plenum, unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 4-pair, 24 AWG solid copper wires. The insulation and jacketing shall be type CM. Outer jacket shall be blue. Under-carpet wiring and flat wiring are not allowed. B. Horizontal Voice Cabling - All building voice cable shall consist of listed, category 5e or 5e, non-plenum, unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 4-pair, 24 AWG solid copper wires. The insulation and jacketing shall be type CM. Outer jacket shall be white. Under- carpet wiring and flat wiring are not allowed. C. Multi-Pair Voice Cable – Multi-pair telephone cable shall be 22 AWG solid annealed copper conductors with low density polyethylene jacket, non-plenum rated. 2.4 EQUIPMENT, TERMINATIONS, AND CONNECTING HARDWARE A. All horizontal copper data cable shall terminate at patch panels. Patch panels shall be rated Category 6 and shall be equipped with rear cable manager, icon/label holders, designation labels, cable ties and mounting hardware. Patch panels shall be equal to Siemon HD6 series. Patch panel quantities shall be per the plans. B. All horizontal copper voice cable shall terminate onto modular type 66 blocks. Blocks shall be rated Category 5e, shall be constructed of flame-retardent thermoplastic, shall include fanning strips with labeling surface, and shall be mounted onto a stand-off to allow space for routing cables behind each block. Blocks shall be equal to Siemon S66M1series. S66 block quantities shall be per the plans. C. Equipment racks shall be 84” x 19”, aluminum, with quantity and accessories per the details on the plan. Equipment racks shall be equal to Siemon RS. D. Multi-pair voice cables shall be provided per the plans and shall be terminated onto 66 blocks in telecommuniucations closets where identified on the plans. Cables shall be extended into Owner’s PBX room for termination by Owner’s representative. Provide a minimum of 20’ spare cable in PBX Room. 2.5 OUTLETS A. RJ45 Couplers, for voice and data, shall be angled, Siemon CT-6 or equal. Each coupler shall include a colored icon tab, white with telephone image for voice, blue with computer image for data. B. Couplers shall be arranged in combinations of single, dual and blanks depending upon the number required at a particular location per the contract drawings. C. Faceplates shall be single-gang, plastic, with labels and label covers. Siemon CT series or equal. D. Colors shall be white. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER WIRE AND CABLES A. All cables shall be continuous (no splicing allowed), extending from the work area telecomm outlet/connector to patch panel. The maximum cable length between the telecommunications closet to the telecomm outlet box shall be 90 m (295 ft). B. Cables shall not be placed in the same conduit or raceway with electrical power distribution components as required by NEC Article 800. C. Wiring installation shall meet the requirements of category 6 for data (category 5e for voice) installation procedures and all manufacturer's installation requirements. Cables, connectors, and equipment shall be listed for the location installed. D. Horizontal Work Area Cable – A quantity of horizontal work area cables equal to that specified on the plans shall be installed to each telecomm outlet box. E. Cabling from workstations shall be routed parallel or at right angles to walls and shall be supported by j-hooks connected to the building structure. Cables shall be routed toward the nearest corridor and shall then follow the corridor to a point at a right angle to the tel/data room. Cables shall be tie wrapped together and supported using j-hooks at 6’ intervals. Cables shall not be supported by ductwork, fire sprinkler piping, conduit, etc. F. Where cable runs penetrate wall assemblies bushed EMT conduit sleeves, minimum 2” trade size, shall be provided. In no case will holes simply be torn through sheetrock. All sleeves shall be sealed with fire putty after cables have been installed. G. In remodel areas it may be possible to reuse existing cables. Existing cables may only be reused with the permission of the Owner on a case-by-case basis. 3.2 TERMINATIONS A. Service loops or slack wire shall be provided in each cable terminating at the data rack termination devices to provide a minimum of 1 m (3.3 ft) of slack for maintenance or re- termination purposes. Provide a 300 mm (1 ft) minimum of each cable terminating at each telecomm outlet box. This slack shall not be coiled or stuffed in the outlet box or conduit, but left loose in cavity above or below the wall, freely accessible by light pulling from the outlet box. B. Telecomm outlet data terminations cross-connections to the data backbone shall be made by the Owner. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Grounding shall be per the NEC and local codes. When there is a code conflict the most stringent requirement shall be followed. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 6 B. The main tel/data room shall be grounded using insulated No. 6 AWG minimum ground wire from the buildings main service entrance equipment to an isolated copper ground bar kit mounted in the backboards' center C. All protection devices, frames, racks, cabinets, and telephone and data equipment shall be bonded to the ground bar. When compatible or more stringent than code, follow grounding instructions of the equipment manufacturer. D. Grounding paths to the ground bar shall be kept short (under 1 meter or 3.3 ft, install additional isolated ground bars as needed). Do not form ground loops. 3.4 PROTECTION FROM PHYSICAL DAMAGE A. The cable network shall be structured and equipped in accordance with EIA Standards to minimize vulnerability. All wire and cable shall be routed away from potential sources of mechanical and electrical damage or interference. B. Required Conduits - 3/4" EMT shall be provided from each telecomm outlet box, through the top of the wall and extended to the nearest accessible ceiling location. The conduit shall be bushed and a ninety degree ell shall be provided directed toward the nearest corridor. Flexible conduits shall not be used. C. In cases where cable must pass through utility spaces where no ceiling space is available, the cables will be installed 100% in conduit. 3.5 LABELING A. The Contractor shall label each cable, work station coupler and patch panel in accordance with EIA/TIA standards. The Owner shall be consulted to determine the unique numbering system for the project. B. The Contractor shall then apply this label to each patch panel jack, both ends of each cable, and each terminated coupler at the workstation end. All labels shall be typed. Handwritten labels are prohibited. Labels shall be located within inserts at the patch panel and outlet faceplate. 3.6 TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION A. Testing of all newly installed cable links shall be performed prior to acceptance by the owner. The Owner reserves the right to have a representative present during all or a portion of the testing process. B. All Category 5e or Category 6 field testing shall be performed with an approved level IIe or III UTP/ScTP field test device. C. All Category 6 links shall perform equal to or better than the minimum requirements as specified below: ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 7 Parameter 100Mhz (dB) 160Mhz (dB) Insertion Loss 22.1 dB 28.3 dB NEXT Loss 33.9 dB 30.9 dB PS NEXT Loss 31.5 dB 28.4 dB ACR 11.8 dB 2.6 dB PS ACR 9.4 dB 0.1 dB ELFEXT 20.2 dB 16.2 dB PS ELFEXT 17.6 dB 13.6 dB Return Loss 13.1 dB 10.7 dB Propagation Delay 490 ns 490 ns Delay Skew 30 ns 30 ns D. All UTP/ScTP field testers shall be factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test equipment manufacturer as stipulated by the manuals provided with the field test unit. The calibration certificate shall be provided for review prior to the start of testing. Autotest settings provided in the field tester for testing the installed cabling shall be set to the default parameters. Test settings selected from options provided in the field testers shall be compatible with the installed cable under test. Category 5e or higher, UTP/ScTP horizontal cables, whose length does not exceed 90 m (295 ft) for the basic link shall be 100 percent tested according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-67 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-5. Test parameters include wire map plus ScTP shield continuity (when present), length, NEXT loss (pair-to-pair), NEXT loss (power sum), ELFEXT loss (pair- to-pair), ELFEXT loss (power sum), return Loss, attenuation, propagation delay, and delay skew. Testing shall verify that the final termination of all cabling is operational and meets the operational specifications. E. All test records shall be created by the installation contractor and turned over to the owner at completion of the work. The format shall be computer based and both soft and hard copies shall be part of the as-built package. The minimum requirements include: 1. Cable records must contain the identifier, cable type, termination positions at both ends, splice information as well as any damaged pairs/conductors. 2. Connecting hardware and connecting hardware position records must contain the identifier, type, damaged position numbers, and references to the cable identifier attached to it. 3. Test documentation on all cable types shall be included as part of the as-built package. F. The contractor shall maintain a set of as-built drawings depicting all voice/data outlet locations of the final installation, and their respective label #'s. Upon completion of the system, the contractor shall transfer this information onto an AutoCad floorplan and plot three new, clean sets of as-built drawings. The contractor shall submit these final as-built drawings to the Architect within 10 days following submittal of the completion letter. Upon request, the Engineer shall transmit an electronic floorplan to the Contractor to assist in this effort. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION VOICE AND DATA WIRING SYSTEMS 271500 - 8 3.7 CERTIFICATION & WARRANTY A. Upon completion of the project the voice and data contractor shall provide a letter to the Owner with copies sent to the Architect and Engineer. The letter shall substantially contain the following: B. The undersigned, having been engaged as the Contractor for the Voice and Data System in the construction of the Sidney Health Center Remodel/Addition hereby confirms that the voice and data equipment was installed and tested in accordance with this specification and industry standards. It has been completely tested, demonstrated and accepted by the Owner or his Representative. C. The system, including all components, shall be warranted for FIVE years. END OF SECTION 271500 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1 SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The electrical contractor, through subcontract with an authorized MirCom Fire Alarm Contractor, shall furnish and install, complete and ready for operation, an intelligent, addressable, digital Fire Alarm System, including panel, detectors, pull stations, door holders, local alarms, wiring, remote booster power supplies, signal appliances, and any and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational system, as shown on the drawings and indicated herein. B. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be licensed by the State in which the project is located. All fire alarm equipment shall be installed exclusively by installers and workmen that are employees of the fire alarm system contractor. All installers and workmen shall be National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) certified for fire alarm systems at level two or greater. All submittal preparers shall be resident NICET level four in fire alarm and shall be state licensed. Contractors and workmen not complying with this specification shall not be allowed to perform this work. C. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall prepare plans and calculations required by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), shall submit all required documents to the AHJ for approval, and shall obtain all necessary permits or approvals from the AHJ including anything required prior to installation and/or after completion and testing. D. The electrical contractor shall provide for all rough-in (including supply and installation of electrical boxes and raceways) and wire pulling. The fire alarm contractor shall supply wiring and any specialty back-boxes required for the fire alarm contractors equipment. The electrical contractor shall NOT install any fire alarm system components beyond rough-in and wire pulling. The fire alarm contractor shall coordinate all requirements with the electrical contractor prior to bidding. E. All portions of the systems shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, details, and specifications or as required by jurisdictional authorities and codes. Jurisdictional authorities and codes shall take precedence over plans, details and specifications in the event of a dispute between the requirements of contract documents and jurisdictional authorities or codes. F. The position is taken that the Owner is entitled to a project which meets or exceeds the minimum requirements of nationally recognized fire protection standards. All efforts and installations shall be directed toward this end. All deficiencies as noted by fire rating bureaus, insurance service offices or jurisdictional authorities shall be corrected. No extra charges will be allowed on this account. G. The fire alarm subcontractor shall coordinate all requirements with the electrical, sprinkler, fire protection, elevator, temperature control and/or other subcontractors. Any additional requirements or detail not shown on the drawings, but required for a ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 2 complete working integrated system will be the responsibility of the fire alarm subcontractor. H. Temperature control contractor shall connect to appropriate devices or modules provided and installed by fire alarm subcontractor to accomplish HVAC control and shutdown. I. Work to be performed under this section shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Fire Alarm System a. Control Panel b. Programming c. Audible/Visual Alarm Devices d. Pull Stations e. Smoke/Heat Detectors f. Door Holders g. Interface to Elevator Shunt Trip or Starter Equipment h. Monitoring of Elevator Shunt Trip or Starter Control Voltage i. Interface to Fire Sprinkler Switches and Solenoid Valve j. Interface to HVAC Equipment. k. Interface to fire/smoke dampers including packaged smoke detectors, where present l. Installation of Auto-Dialer. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements of both the General and Special Conditions and the Mechanical and Electrical Specification. 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The term jurisdictional authority used in this section of the specification shall include, as applicable, but not be limited to the following: 1. Local Building Department and Fire Department. 2. State Fire Marshall. 3. Insurance Services Office or Insuring Authority having jurisdiction. 4. Owner. B. The design and installation of all systems of fire protection shall conform to all requirements of applicable codes and publications herein defined: 1. International Building Code 2. International Fire Code 3. NFPA #72 4. NFPA #70 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 3 5. All State and local ordinances 6. Underwriters Laboratories. 7. Factory Mutual. 8. American Society of Testing Materials. 9. American National Standards Institute. 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 11. Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The successful Contractor shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of these specifications. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special Conditions of these specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals. B. The contractor shall submit to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) all necessary documents, plans, calculations and any other details required by NFPA and the AHJ necessary to receive approval and permitting from the AHJ for the work required. Submit plans to the State Health department when required for proper review of project. C. Should the AHJ require professionally engineered (P.E) stamped plans the contractor shall engage the proper engineering services, at contractors cost, to meet the requirements of the AHJ at no additional cost to the project. ACE Engineering will not stamp plans for this purpose. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper locations and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for fire alarm system work, and shall obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress to avoid delay of the work. B. All fees and permits specifically required for fire alarm work, not obtained by others as specified elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by the fire alarm contractor. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Three (3) sets of operating and maintenance instructions shall be provided the Owner upon completion. 1.7 TRAINING A. The fire alarm contractor shall supply on-site training at the owner's facility to familiarize the Owner with the basic operation of the system. 1.8 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 4 A. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall guarantee to the Owner in writing, all equipment and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the fire alarm system has been placed in continuous service and has been accepted by all authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers/Installers: 1. System Northwest. 2. Montana Wyoming Systems 3. API Systems Integrators 4. Kenco. 5. Simplex Grinnell 6. Johnson Controls 2.2 CONTROL PANEL A. Digital, addressable control panel with capability meeting or exceeding project requirments. 2.3 DETECTORS A. SMOKE – Edwards SIGA-IS or equal. B. HEAT – Edwards SIGA-HRS or equal. C. DUCT DETECTOR – Edwards SIGA-DH housing with appropriate detector and sample tube. In smaller ducts, where code allows, a standard detector may be installed inside the duct in place of a detector with sample tube. In larger ducts provide duct detector suitable for no flow detection, or provide a duct detector along with a standard detector mounted inside the duct. D. Coordinate locations of all detectors with air supply and return grills and maintain 36" separation. E. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the project has undergone FINAL cleaning in accordance with NFPA 72. In the event detectors are installed prior to final cleaning, the contractor shall clean or replace all detectors at no additional cost to the Owner. Installation of protective plastic covers does not meet the intent of this requirement. 2.4 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Edwards SIGA-278 or equal. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 5 2.5 ALARM DEVICES A. CEILING MOUNT CHIMES – Edwards 922-1B-002 B. CHIME/STROBES - Edwards 757-5A-CS or equal. 1. Provide appliance and backbox suitable for outdoor installation. 2.6 WIRE AND CONDUIT A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with NFPA #70 (NEC). B. All wiring shall be in conduit. No conduit shall be exposed except in equipment rooms, elevator shafts, tel/data closets or other utility spaces. OR: C. All wiring shall be routed in a combination of conduit and cable tray/cable hooks. All wiring within walls shall be in conduit until the conduit penetrates into an area above an accessible ceiling at which point a ninety and bushed end shall be provided in the direction of the cable run. Wiring above gyp. (hard) ceilings shall be in conduit until a point is reached above a suspended ceiling or otherwise accessible area. Conduit is required in all utility spaces where surface-mounted installations are appropriate. D. All low voltage cabling to remote power supplies, boosters or other addressable equipment located remotely from the main panel, or routed through an area not served by the equipment, shall be in conduit. This is so a fire in one area does not disable alarms and devices in an adjacent area. 1. In lieu of conduit, 2-hour fire-rated, UL-listed "CI" cable may be used. E. All junction boxes shall be painted red and labeled "Fire Alarm". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Approximate fire alarm devices, alarm panel, chime, and detector arrangement is indicated on the drawings. Contractor is responsible for all required devices and locations. B. The entire fire alarm system is not shown on plans. The intent is to provide complete fire alarm systems as required. This Contractor shall be responsible for preparing working drawings for the total system. Contractor shall provide additional devices as required. C. The contractor shall provide a smoke detector at the fire alarm control panel as shown on the plans. The contractor shall provide additional detectors at any other control ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 6 units or sub-panels required by their system design if required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Where the fire alarm system interlocks to a shunt-trip circuit breaker or other device providing power to an elevator, the contractor shall provide the means to monitor the control circuit voltage of the circuit breaker or starter. In the event control voltage is lost, the fire alarm system shall annunciate the problem and relay the information via the auto-dialer. E. The location and quantity of fire sprinkler flow and tamper switches shown on the plans are approximate. Final location and quantity is determined by the fire sprinkler contractor’s design. The fire alarm contractor is responsible to coordinate all fire sprinkler switches with the fire sprinkler contractor and connect to all switches installed whether shown on the plans or not. F. Audible Notification Appliances: Corridor and hall notification appliances are all shown as audible/visual. The contractor shall install the minimum number of audible/visible devices required to achieve minimum sound requirements of NFPA 72. All other corridor and hall notification devices, beyond this minimum, shall be installed as visual notification appliances. G. Elevators: Fire alarm equipment for elevators depends on the construction of the elevator and the elevator shaft, and the design of the fire sprinkler system in the shaft. Therefore the fire alarm contractor shall design their system as follows: 1. Provide smoke and heat detection at all elevator equipment rooms or closets. 2. Provide smoke detection at all elevator landings. 3. Provide interface to elevator power equipment to provide for automatic removal of power in the event heat is detected in the elevator equipment room or closet. 4. Provide interface to elevator equipment to initiate elevator recall functions. Coordinate quantity of relays/contacts required with elevator installer. 5. Provide smoke detection at the top of each elevator shaft only if the fire sprinkler system designer/contractor provides a sprinkler at the top of each shaft. This detector will be used for recall purposes. 6. Provide heat detection at the top of each elevator shaft only if the fire sprinkler system designer/contractor provides a sprinkler at the top of each shaft. This detector will be used to remove power before the sprinkler discharges. 7. Provide heat detection in the elevator pit only if the fire sprinkler system designer/contractor provides a sprinkler in the pit. This is typically only required if the elevator uses flammable hydraulic fluid. This detector will be used for recall purposes. 8. Coordinate with the fire sprinkler designer/contractor and the AHJ and provide fire alarm equipment and programming necessary to complement the sprinkler designer/contractor's equipment and satisfy the AHJ's requirements. H. Provide the following at each smoke damper and fire/smoke damper: 1. If smoke and fire/smoke dampers are packaged with an integral smoke detector, provide a module to monitor the smoke detector packaged with the damper. Connect the module to an auxiliary contact on the smoke detector or a position switch on the damper (if so equipped). Provide a blinking red L.E.D. remote ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 7 alarm in an accessible location that provides a visual indication when the smoke detector alarms and the damper is closed. Install the L.E.D. alarm indicator in the ceiling below the damper. Label the L.E.D. alarm indicator with the air handler identification tag from which the duct is fed. 2. If smoke and fire/smoke dampers are not packaged with integral smoke detection, provide an addressable duct smoke detector within 5' of the damper. Also provide a relay module to cut power to the damper, resulting in the closure of the damper. Provide a blinking red L.E.D. remote alarm in an accessible location that provides a visual indication when the smoke detector alarms and the damper is closed. Install the L.E.D. alarm indicator in the ceiling below the damper. Label the L.E.D. alarm indicator with the air handler identification tag from which the duct is fed. 3. Provide 120v power to each damper. If indicated on plans, provide power as directed. If not indicated on the plans, provide power from nearest unswitched 120v source. 3.2 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The system shall be activated by pull station or active initiation devices. Upon any alarm in the system the following shall happen: 1. All indicating appliances shall activate in all areas until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel. 2. All control relays shall change state. 3. All information shall be added to the history log of the panel. 4. A signal shall be transmitted to the digital dialer as to the location of the alarm input. Ability to transmit each alarm point is required. Dialer is to be provided in the contract as well as two years of “off site monitoring” by a UL listed fire alarm central station. B. The alarm activation of any smoke detector shall initiate the closure of all HVAC fire/smoke dampers. This shall be done following a 15 second delay to ensure related HVAC equipment has shut down so ducts are not damaged by over-pressurization. C. The system shall interface with the facility elevator to accomplish elevator recall/capture functions. The system shall interface to the elevator shaft vent, if present, causing the vent to open if smoke is detected in the shaft. D. The system shall interface to the elevator main power supply to cut power in the event of heat detection in the elevator machine room, or the elevator shaft if a sprinkler is present at the top of the shaft. E. The system shall monitor the fire sprinkler system and shall alarm if sprinkler flow is detected. In this event, the system shall cause the domestic water solenoid valve to close (if present). Tamper switch activation shall initiate a trouble, not general, alarm. F. The system shall continuously check for malfunctions or troubles. Upon detecting any fault the following shall occur. 1. Activate a reporting signal tone at main panel. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 8 2. Indicate the point location on the main F.A. panel as to the location and type of the fault. 3. Add all information to the history log of the panel. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Final connections between all fire alarm equipment and the wiring system shall be made only by or under the supervision of an authorized representative of the system manufacturer. B. Coordinate locations of smoke detectors with air supply and return grills and maintain 36" separation. C. The fire alarm contractor shall provide red labels: 1. On the fire alarm control panel indicating the panel and circuit supplying power to the panel. 2. Next to the circuit breaker inside the panel supplying power to the fire alarm control panel stating “FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL”. 3.4 FINAL TESTS AND REPORT A. Upon completion of the installation and system tests, the certified test technician shall submit to the Architect three copies of a written report on forms provided by the manufacturer, to indicate the system has been fully tested in supervision, trouble and alarm modes and is fully operational conforming to the letter of these Specifications. 3.5 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS A. The contractor shall provide two inspections of each system under this Contract during the one (1) year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six month interval after system acceptance and the second at the 12 month interval. Inspections shall include confirmation that the system is in proper working order. Inspections shall also include a complete checkout of the control and alarm system. Documents certifying satisfactory system conditions shall be submitted to the Owner's technical representative upon completion of each inspection. END OF SECTION 283111 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTHWORK 31 - 1 DIVISION 31 -EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Earthwork specifications are Montana Public Works Standard Specifications (MPWSS), Sixth Edition, and City of Bozeman Public Works requirements, including most recent addenda. MPWSS specification sections and City of Bozeman Public Worksrequirements are included by reference only. Where specifications differ, the most stringent specifications will apply. B.The divisions of MPWSS are based on the 1995 CSI 16-division format,which was modified in 2004 to its present 50-division format. To assist the Contractor, the table below cross-references CSI Division 31 Sections with MPWSS sections that describethe required earthwork. Other sections of MPWSS may be related to the specified work, but are not referenced in this table. CSI Division 31 Sections Corresponding MPWSS Sections 311100 Clearing and Grubbing 02112 Removal of Existing Pavement, Concrete Curb, Sidewalk, Driveway and/or Structures 02230 Street Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 311400 Earth Stripping and Stockpiling 02230 Street Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 312200 Grading 02230 Street Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 312300 Excavation and Fill 02230 Street Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 312323.33 Flowable Fill 02225 Flowable Fill 312333 Trenching and Backfilling 02221 Trench Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines and Appurtenant Structures C.All work shall be paid for as part of the lump sum contract price. Unit price payment provided in MPWSS does not apply. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTHWORK 31 - 2 D.In addition to MPWSS sections listed above, this Division includes: 1.Section 312000 “Earth Moving” for additional requirements regarding excavating and backfilling for buildings, structures, and interior slabs-on-grade. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Quality assurance testing shall be conducted by the Contractor. 1.In-place density testing of compacted subgrade shall be conducted at a spacing of no greater than 50 feet. Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight tests. B.Reports of all testing shall be provided to the Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DIVISION 31 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1 SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Removing existing vegetation.2.Clearing and grubbing.3.Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 4.Temporary erosion-and sedimentation-control measures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. B.Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. C.Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. D.Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2 1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B.Utility Locator Service: Notify One Call at 811 or1-800-424-5555 for area where Project is located before site clearing or excavation. The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to Owner and operators for such inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of injuries or damage which may result from construction operations under this Contract. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible for damages as a result of the Contractor’s failure to protect utilities encountered in the Work. C.Contractor shall exercise reasonable care to verify locations of utilities and facilities on the Drawings and to determine the presence of those not shown. Immediate and adjacent areas where excavations are to be made shall be thoroughly checked by visual examination for indications of underground facilities and checked with electronic metal and pipe detection equipment. Where there is reasonable cause to verify the presence or absence of an underground utility, the Contractor shall use exploratory excavations prior to proceeding with major excavations in the area. D.Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion-and sedimentation-control measures are in place. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1.Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A.Provide temporary erosion-and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3 1.Erosion and sedimentation control measures must be approved by the City of Bozeman. Prior to commencing work, submit a City of Bozeman Stormwater Management Form. B.Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. C.Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion-and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. D.Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A.Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. B.Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 3.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B.Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C.Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1.Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused.2.Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 311000 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1 SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B.Geotechnical Report prepared by TD&H Engineering, dated September 24, 2015 for site-specific soil investigation and construction recommendations. C.Montana Public Works Standard Specifications, including adopted amendments. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 2.Drainage course for interior concrete slabs-on-grade. B.Related Sections: 1.Section 311000 “Site Clearing” for erosion and sedimentation control requirements. 1.3 PRECEDENCE A.Where inconsistent or conflicting requirements are given for earth moving, the following descending order of precedence shall applied: 1.Geotechnical Report. 2.Montana Public Works Standard Specifications.3.Section 312000 “Earth Moving.” 1.4 DEFINITIONS A.Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1.Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.2.Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B.Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2 C.Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. D.Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1.Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2.Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.3.Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. E.Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. F.Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. G.Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. H.Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated. B.Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations. 1.Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B.Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3 C.Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion-and sedimentation-control measures, are in place. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A.General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C.Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1.Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D.Structural Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 100 percent passing a 3 inch sieve, 20 to 50 percent passing a No. 4 sieve, and not more than 12percent passing a No.8 sieve. E.Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed,or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No.8 sieve. F.Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations. B.Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations. C.Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4 3.2 DEWATERING A.Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B.Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A.Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1.If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. B.Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions with in a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A.Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B.If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C.Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. D.Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A.Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi or structural fill compacted to requirements stated herein, may be used when approved by Architect. 1.Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect. 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A.Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.8 BACKFILL A.Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1.Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.2.Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.3.Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4.Removing concrete formwork.5.Removing trash and debris. 6.Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7.Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B.Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A.Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1.Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2.Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6 3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A.Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches loose depth.. B.Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C.Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1.Under structures at 98 percent. 2.Under building slabs, compact top of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill material at 95 percent. 3.11 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS A.Refer to Geotechnical Report. 3.12 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER INTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE A.Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B.On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1.Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1.Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.2.Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3.Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B.Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C.Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. D.Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EARTH MOVING 312000 - 7 other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. E.Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1.Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft.or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2.Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. F.When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.14 PROTECTION A.Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B.Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C.Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 - 1 DIVISION 32 –EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Earthwork specifications are Montana Public Works Standard Specifications (MPWSS), Sixth Edition, and City of Bozeman Public Works requirements, including most recent addenda. MPWSS specification sections and City of Bozeman Public Worksrequirements are included by reference only. Where specifications differ, the most stringent specifications will apply. B.The divisions of MPWSS are based on the 1995 CSI 16-division format,which was modified in 2004 to its present 50-division format. To assist the Contractor, the table below cross-references CSI Division 32 Sections with MPWSS sections that describethe required earthwork. Other sections of MPWSS may be related to the specified work, but are not referenced in this table. CSI Division 32 Sections Corresponding MPWSS Sections 320519 Geosynthetics for Exterior Improvements 02110 Geotextiles 321116 Subbase Courses 02234 Sub Base Course 321123 Aggregate Base Courses 02235 Crushes Base Course 321213 Preparatory Coats 02502 Asphalt Prime and/or Tack Coat 321216 Asphalt Paving 02510 Asphalt Concrete Pavement 321313 Concrete Paving 02529 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, Approaches, Curb Turn Fillets, Valley Gutters, and Miscellaneous New Concrete Construction03210 Reinforcing Steel (Exterior Concrete)03310 Structural Concrete (Exterior Only) 321613 Curbs and Gutters 02528 Concrete Curb and Gutter 321723 Pavement Markings 02581 Pavement Markings and Markers 329300 Plants 02910 Seeding ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 - 2 02920 Hydraulic Seeding C.All work shall be paid for as part of the lump sum contract price. Unit price payment provided in MPWSS does not apply. D.In addition to MPWSS sections listed above, this Division includes: 1.Section 323113 “Chain Link Fences and Gates” for chain link fencing assemblies and swing gates. 2.Section 323200 “Vertical Pivot Lift Gates”for vertically pivoting vehicle access gates. 3.Section 328400 “Planting Irrigation”for landscape irrigation systems. 4.Section 329200 “Turf and Grasses”for ground cover plantings.5.Section 329300 “Plants”for shrub and tree planting. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Quality assurance testing shall be conducted by the Contractor. 1.In-place density testing of compacted sub-base course shall be conducted at a spacing of no greater than 50 feet. Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight tests.2.In-place density testing of compacted crushed base course shall be conducted at a spacing of no greater than 50 feet. Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight tests.3.The Contractor shall provide a job-mix formula for the asphalt concrete and one field marshal verification.4.At least four asphalt core samples shall be taken for the asphalt concrete pavement. 5.One set of concrete cylinders shall be tested for every 50 cubic yards of concrete used for exterior improvements. B.Reports of all testing shall be provided to the Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DIVISION 32 ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1 SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Sprinklers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Provide and install replacement piping matching existing piping to the greatest extent possible. B. PVC Pipe (Assumed): ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound. 2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. General Requirements: Provide and install replacement sprinklers matching existing equipment to the greatest extent possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping free of sags and bends. B. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 2 C. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust settings of controllers. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 3 B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade. END OF SECTION 328400 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1 SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sodding. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Sod: Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. 1.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of planting completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Species readily available from local suppliers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 2 1. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 3.2 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended by sod supplier but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod. 3.3 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. C. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 3 recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. 3.4 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. END OF SECTION 329200 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTS 329300 - 1 SECTION 329300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. C. Handle planting stock by root ball. D. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion: a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: Six months. c. Annuals: Three months. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTS 329300 - 2 1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: Six months from date of planting completion. 2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Three months from date of planting completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. C. Annuals and Biennials: Provide healthy, disease-free plants with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. 2.2 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum. B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd.. 2.3 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTS 329300 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations maybe used as planting soil. 3.3 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. D. Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grade. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTS 329300 - 4 1. Use planting soil for backfill. E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.4 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. 3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.6 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING INTERIOR ALTERATION PLANTS 329300 - 5 recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. END OF SECTION 329300 (BLANK PAGE) ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION UTILITIES 33 - 1 DIVISION 33 –UTILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Earthwork specifications are Montana Public Works Standard Specifications (MPWSS), Sixth Edition, and City of Bozeman Public Works requirements, including most recent addenda. MPWSS specification sections and City of Bozeman Public Worksrequirements are included by reference only. Where specifications differ, the most stringent specifications will apply. B.The divisions of MPWSS are based on the 1995 CSI 16-division format,which was modified in 2004 to its present 50-division format. To assist the Contractor, the table below cross-references CSI Division 33 Sections with MPWSS sections that describethe required earthwork. Other sections of MPWSS may be related to the specified work, but are not referenced in this table. CSI Division 33 Sections Corresponding MPWSS Sections 331000 Water Utilities 02660 Water Distribution Systems 333000 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities 02730 Sanitary Sewer Collection System 334000 Storm Drainage Utilities 02720 Storm Drain Systems C.All work shall be paid for as part of the lump sum contract price. Unit price payment provided in MPWSS does not apply. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Quality assurance testing shall be conducted by the Contractor. 1.In-place density testing of compacted water and sewer service trench backfill shall be conducted. Contractor shall provide four tests per service line (eight tests minimum). Tests shall be conducted at two different elevations. B.Reports of all testing shall be provided to the Owner. ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDINGINTERIOR ALTERATION UTILITIES 33 - 2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF DIVISION 33 CONCRETE COMPACTED GRAVEL EARTH BRICK C.M.U. STEEL FINISH WOOD BATT INSUL. RIGID INSUL. GYP. BD. DETAIL REFERENCE1 A1.0 SECTION CUT1 A3.0 INTERIOR ELEVATION1 A4.0 ROOM NUMBER 100 ROOM DOOR NUMBER100 WINDOW TYPEA NOTE REFERENCE1 WALL TYPEA COPYRIGHT 2015 COVER SHEET OWNER:ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION 20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715 A1.0 LOWER LEVEL PLAN A1.1 MAIN LEVEL PLAN A1.2 UPPER LEVEL PLAN A1.3 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS & DETAILS A2.0 EXTERIOR ELEVATION & DETAILS (ALTERNATE) A2.1 ALTERNATE DETAILS A4.0 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ARCHITECTURAL NO.DRAWING SHEET SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS: GENERAL NOTES ALL WORK INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT, SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE, INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, ICC ELECTRICAL CODE, AND ALL OTHER LAWS, CODES, OF LOCAL, COUNTY, STATE, AND LOCAL JURISDICTION INVOLVED. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO STARTING THE WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY GRADES, SITE CONDITIONS, AND COMPARE THAT WITH THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. WHERE CONFLICT EXISTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT UPON RECOGNITION OF ANY DISCREPENCY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY STUDY ALL PLANS AND DRAWINGS, AND SHALL REPORT IMMEDIATELY TO THE ARCHITECT ANY ERRORS, INCONSISTENCIES OR OMISSIONS THEY MAY DISCOVER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT WORK WITHOUT DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSULT THE ARCHITECT OR SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND/OR LITERATURE TO THE ARCHITECT FOR APPOVAL PRIOR TO STARTING THE WORK. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE ALL NOTICES AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL LAWS, ORDINANCES, RULES, REGULATIONS, AND ORDERS OF PUBLIC AUTHORITY BEARING ON THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. IF THE CONTRACTOR OBSERVES THAT ANY OF THE ONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE AT VARIANCE THEREWITH IN ANY RESPECT THEY SHALL PROMTLY NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY CHANGES REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT WITH APPROPRIATE MODIFICATION. ONLY APPROVED 'CONSTRUCTION SET' MARKED DRAWINGS INCORPORATING ALL ADDENDUM AND DIMENSION CLARIFICATIONS SHALL BE USED DURING THE EXECUTION OF THE WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE WRITTEN DIMENSIONS ONLY, OR AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CROSS REFERENCES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS DO NOT NECCESARILY INDICATE ALL LIKE CONDITIONS AND DO NOT LIMIT APPLICATION OF ANY DRAWING OR DETAIL. THEY MAY APPLY TO OTHER, SAME, OR SIMILAR CONDITIONS NOT REFERENCED. INTERIOR WALL DIMENSIONS (FOR NEW WALLS ONLY) ARE TO FACE OF STUD FRAMING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SECTION AND INTERIOR ELEVATION DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE TOP OF CONCRETE OR METAL DECKING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS WORK TO SECURE COMPLIANCE OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, THE ACCURATE LOCATION OF STRUCTURE MEMBERS, AND OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, STAIRS, ELEVATORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH RESPECTIVE SUB-CONTRACTORS, AS WELL AS SHOP DRAWINGS REVIEWED BY THE ARCHITECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL ROUGH-IN DIMENSIONS FOR EQUIPMENT AND PROVIDE ALL BUCK-OUT BLOCKING AND BACKING REQUIRED BY THIS CONTRACT AND OTHERS. WHERE PIPING, CONDUIT, AND/OR DUCTS PASS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS, PACK AROUND OPENINGS WITH SAFING OR SPRAY INSULATION. PROVIDE FIRE DAMPERS WHERE NECESSARY. CODE CHECK ABBREVIATIONS NOTES AND SYMBOLS CODES: BUILDING INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (2012) FIRE INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (2012) ACCESSIBILITY ANSI 117.1 MECHANICAL INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (2012) PLUMBING UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE (2012) ELECTRICAL NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (2014) CODE SOURCE:REQUIREMENTS: PERMITS LOCAL JURISDICTION LOCAL JURISDICTION OCCUPANCY IBC CH. 3 GROUP "B" OCCUPANCY SEPARATION IBC TABLE 302.3.3 NOT REQUIRED CONSTRUCTION TYPE IBC CH. 6 V-B FIRE RESISTANCE IBC CH. 7 0 HR. AREA SEPARATION IBC. CH. 5 NOT USED ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA IBC TABLE 503 9,000 SF (B) AREA INCREASE (FRONTAGE)IBC SECT. 506.2 NOT USED AREA INCREASE (SPRINKLER)IBC SECT. 506.3 200% TOTAL ALLOWABLE AREA IBC SECT. 506.1 9000 + 9000(2) = 27,000 SF ACTUAL AREA LOWER (L): 7,425 SF +/- MAIN (M): 7,425 SF +/- UPPER (U): 7,425 SF +/- TOTAL: 22,275 SF +/- NUMBER OF STORIES IBC TABLE 503 3 (INC. ADDL. PER 504.2) ACTUAL STORIES (2) ABOVE GRADE PLANE (1) BELOW GRADE PLANE EXITING: MAX. FLOOR AREA IBC TABLE 1004.1.2 BUSINESS (B) - 100 GROSS ALLOWANCES PER OCC. EXIT CALCULATION BASED IBC SECT. 1004 LOWER (L): 74.25 ON OCCUPANT LOAD MAIN (M): 74.25 UPPER (U): 74.25 EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE IBC TABLE 1016.2 300 FT. W/ SPRINKLER SYSTEM MINIMUM EGRESS WIDTH IBC TABLE 1005.3.2 (.2)222.75=44.55 INCHES MINUMUM CORRIDOR WIDTH IBC SECT. 1016.2 44 INCHES CORRIDOR RATING IBC TABLE 1016.1 0 HR. W/SPRINKLER SYSTEM ROOF CONSTRUCTION IBC TABLE 1505.1 CLASS "C" (EXISTING) FLAME SPREAD: ENCLOSED VERTICAL EXITWAYS IBC TABLE 803.9 CLASS "B" (EXISTING) OTHER EXITWAYS IBC TABLE 803.9 CLASS "C" (EXISTING) ROOMS OR AREAS IBC TABLE 803.9 CLASS "C" (EXISTING) NOTE:BUILDING IS PROVIDED WITH AN APPROVED AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC SECTION 903.3.1.1 ALUM.ALUMINUM MECH.MECHANICAL ANN.ANNUNCIATOR A.P.C.ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG.MANUFACTURER M.R.MOISTURE RESISTANT BD.BOARD MTL.METAL BLCK'G.BLOCKING N.I.C.NOT IN CONTRACT CAB.CABINET CER.CERAMIC O.C.ON CENTER CLR.CLEARANCE O.S.B.ORIENTED STRAND BOARD COMP.COMPOSITE O.F.C.I.OWNER FURNISHED CONC.CONCRETE CONTRACTOR INSTALLED CONF.CONFERENCE O.F.O.I.OWNER FURNISHED CORR.CORRIDOR OWNER INSTALLED C.M.U.CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT C.T.CERAMIC TILE P.PAINT CUST.CUSTOM P. LAM.PLASTIC LAMINATE P.T.PAPER TOWEL D.F.DRINKING FOUNTAIN PRE-FIN.PRE-FINISHED DISP.DISPENSER PVC.POLYVINYLCHLORIDE D.M.DRYMARK BOARD DR.DRAWER R.RADIUS REC.RECESSED E.I.F.S.EXTERIOR INSULATION REST.RESTROOM FINISH SYSTEM REQ'D.REQUIRED E.P.S.EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE ELEV.ELEVATION S.STAIN S.C.SOLID CORE F.D.FLOOR DRAIN S.F.SQUARE FEET F.E.FIRE EXTINGUISHER S.V.SHEET VINYL F.F.FINISH FLOOR SIM.SIMILAR F.S.FLOOR SINK SPECS.SPECIFICATIONS FLR.FLOORING STOR.STORAGE FDN.FOUNDATION F.O.FACE OF T.B.TACK BOARD T.O.TOP OF G.B.GYPSUM WALLBOARD T.P.TOILET PAPER GWB GYPSUM WALLBOARD TYP.TYPICAL GYP. BD.GYPSUM WALLBOARD V.B.VAPOR BARRIER V.C.T.VINYL COMPOSITION TILE HC.HANDICAPPED VER.VERIFY H.M.HOLLOW METAL W/WITH INSUL.INSULATION W/O WITHOUT JAN.JANITOR MATERIALS LEGEND D1.0 DEMOLITION PLANS & NOTES PHASING DESCRIPTION: PHASE 1: LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION AND NEW CONSTRUCTION PHASE 2:MAIN LEVEL AND UPPER LEVEL DEMOLITION AND NEW CONSTRUCTION MECHANICAL/PLUMBING NO.DRAWING SHEET MP1.0 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING LEGENDS AND SCHEDULES MP2.0 LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS MP2.1 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS MP2.2 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS ELECTRICAL NO.DRAWING SHEET E1.0 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND SCHEDULES E1.1 OVERALL ELECTRICAL PLANS ED2.0 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN ED2.1 FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN ED2.2 SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN E2.0 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLAN E2.1 FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLAN E2.2 SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLAN 987654321 A B C D EELEC.ELEC. GAS CLOSET DUMB WAITER BOILER ROOM MECHANICAL ROOM TOOL ROOM FILE STORAGE ROOM CONFERENCE MAINTENANCE RESTROOM RESTROOM STORAGE OFFICE OFFICE FILE STORAGE ROOM LIBRARY ELEC./ STOR. STORAGE STORAGE DATA CENTER IT STORAGE ELEV. MACHINE ROOM OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE MEETING ROOM WATER/SEWER SERVICE IT/ELEC.REMOVE SINK & CABINETRY - DEMOLITION BY OWNER C C A AA B B B F G A B B A B A F G F G F G F G F G A REMOVE EXISTING COLUMN WRAP REMOVE EXISTING WALL, CREATING A HEADER @ 7'-0" +/- H REMOVE/REPLACE CEILING PANELS AS REQUIRED DURING WORK ON MAIN LEVEL H H H 987654321 A B C D E EXISTING ELEC. PANEL ENGINEERING OFFICES OFFICE VESTIBULE OFFICE JANITOR CLOSET LIBRARY/SMALL MEETING ROOM MODULE ENGINEERING OFFICE BREAK ROOM ENGINEER WORK ROOM WOMEN'S RESTROOM MEN'S RESTROOM SERVER PHONE ROOM PLAT ROOM WORK ROOM PLANNING WORK ROOM MODULE PLANNING OFFICES PLANNING OFFICES VESTIBULE CONFERENCE OFFICE OFFICERECEPTIONA A B F GE PULL BACK EXISTING CPT. & RE-INSTALL AS REQ'D MODIFY EXISTING CEILING GRID & TILES AS REQ'D H 987654321 A B C D E PHONE/POWER CLOSET ELEC. ELEC. D.F. ROOF ACCESS PLAN REVIEW OFFICE ADMIN. WOMEN'S RESTROOM JANITORS CLOSET MEN'S RESTROOM OFFICE OFFICE COPY/ STORAGE OFFICE INSPECTORS STORAGE CONFERENCE RECEPTION MEETING BREAKROOM OFFICE OFFICE SUITE OFFICE OFFICE/STORAGE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE JANITOR/ STORAGE G.I.S D B F G GF A A B C D E F G H SAW CUT AS REQUIRED FOR NEW OPENING (ALTERNATE) REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, DOOR FRAME AND ALL ASSOCIATED HARDWARE IN ITS ENTIRETY. INFILL AS INDICATED. REMOVE & RE-INSTALL CABINETRY & REFRIGERATOR FROM EXISTING BREAKROOM TO NEW BREAKROOM REMOVE EXISTING WALL MOUNTED SHELVING & ACCESSORIES IN THEIR ENTIRETY. IN ROOM INDICATED REMOVE ALL EXISTING A.P.C. CEILING IN ITS ENTIRETY IN ROOM INDICATED REMOVE ALL EXISTING FLOOR COVERING & WALL BASE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMOVE DASHED WALLS IN ITS ENTIRETY. PATCH DRYWALL AND RE-PAINT AS NECESSARY. CUT & PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED FOR NEW WORK. REMOVE EXISTING PARTITION WALL IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, DOOR FRAME AND ALL ASSOCIATED HARDWARE IN ITS ENTIRETY. WITHIN REGIONS INDICATED, SAW CUT AND REMOVE EXISTING FOUNDATION IN ITS ENTIRETY. KEYED DEMOLITION NOTES GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY WITH OWNER ANY ITEMS INDICATED FOR DEMOLITION TO BE SALVAGED TO THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND LOCATIONS OF ALL ELECTRICAL SERVICES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION OF REQUIRED ITEMS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT & PATCH ANY EXISTING WALLS REQUIRING MODIFICATION TO EXISTING OR NEW MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT ADJACENT SURFACES AND MATERIALS NOT INTENDED TO BE DEMOLISHED. PROTECT EXISTING GLASS, MASONRY, WOOD TRIM, DOORS AND WINDOWS, AND OTHER FINISHES DURING CONSTRUCTION TO AVOID UNNECESSARY DAMAGE. ALL UNNECESSARY DAMAGE SHALL BE REPAIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WEATHERTIGHT TEMPORARY ENCLOSURE FOR DEMOLITION OF EXTERIOR ITEMS AS REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ALL STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DEMOLITION WORK. COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:37 PMD1.0 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715DEMOLITION PLANS & NOTES 1/8" = 1'-0"D1.0 1 LOWER LEVEL PLAN - DEMOLITION 1/8" = 1'-0"D1.0 2 MAIN LEVEL PLAN - DEMOLITION 1/8" = 1'-0"D1.0 3 UPPER LEVEL PLAN - DEMOLITION 987654321 A B C D E ELEC. GAS CLOSET LIGHT WELL(ALTERNATE)COAT RACK COUNTER & STORAGE PLAT ROOM 002 CORRIDOR 001 BREAK ROOM 003 MEETING ROOM 004 A4.02 REINSTALL CABINETS FROM EXISTING UPPER LEVEL BREAK ROOM NEW COUNTER TOP RE-INSTALL FRIDGE FROM EXISTING UPPER LEVEL BREAKROOM 1 003004 002 A4.0 5 3 A2.0 ALCOVE 005 8' - 8 1/2"5' - 0"2' - 0"5' - 0"PATCH EXISTING WALL AT DEMO LINE - TYP. AT ALL DEMO LOCATIONS A C A I.1 C A A A INFILL EXISTING DOORWAY A A WRAP AROUND COLUMNS AS NECESSARY 2' - 0"4' - 8"4' - 8"A A A4.0 8 A2.0 1 EXISTING CONCRETE PILASTER A ALIGN NEW TO EXISTING EXISTING CPT.NEW CPT.CPT.V.C.T. PATCH DRYWALL & RE-PAINT AS REQUIRED @ DEMO LINE - TYP. @ ALL DEMO LOCATIONS PATCH DRYWALL & RE-PAINT AS REQUIRED @ DEMO LINE - TYP. @ ALL DEMO LOCATIONS NEW ABOVE COUNTER ELECTRICAL OUTLETS 12' - 1"CREATE 7'-0" HEADER FROM EXISTING WALL 6 34 CONTRACTOR'S OPTION: REMOVE EXISTING DRYWALL IN ITS ENTIRETY TO INSTALL NEW ELECTRICAL. INSTALL NEW GYP. BD. & PAINT AFTER ELECTRICAL WORK IS COMPLETE 70" TV/ PROJECTOR (OWNER PROVIDED) 16' - 7" INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLIES A 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED B 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EXPOSED SIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED C 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE 2x6 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED * ALL WALLS TO BE FULL HEIGHT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:26 PMA1.0 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715LOWER LEVEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"A1.0 1 LOWER LEVEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" WALL TYPES GENERAL NOTE: CUT & PATCH AT EXISTING WALLS REQUIRING NEW POWER/DATA/SWITCHES/ MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOORS. REFERENCE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. REF.987654321 A B C D E EXISTING ELEC. PANEL OFFICE 101 OPEN OFFICE 100 MAINTAIN EXISTING OPENING LIGHT WELL(ALTERNATE)EXISTING PATIO PAD TO REMAIN EQ.EQ. OFFICE 102MAINTAIN EXISTING BREAK ROOM A NEW CHASE 102 A B B 9' - 6"A PATCH DRYWALL & RE-PAINT AS REQUIRED @ DEMO LINE - TYP. @ ALL DEMO LOCATIONS INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLIES A 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED B 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EXPOSED SIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED C 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE 2x6 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED * ALL WALLS TO BE FULL HEIGHT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:27 PMA1.1 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715MAIN LEVEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"A1.1 1 MAIN LEVEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" WALL TYPES GENERAL NOTE: CUT & PATCH AT EXISTING WALLS REQUIRING NEW POWER/DATA/SWITCHES/ MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOORS. REFERENCE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. 987654321 A B C D E ELEC. D.F. ROOF ACCESS OPEN OFFICE 200 OFFICE 201 OFFICE 202 INFILL EXISTING DOOR 11' - 6"EQ.EQ. 201 202 A A A A PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING WALL COLOR IN HALLWAY AND INSTALL MATCHING WALL BASE AS REQ'D INTERIOR WALL ASSEMBLIES A 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED B 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EXPOSED SIDE 2x4 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED C 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE 2x6 WOOD STUD @ 1'-4" O.C. *SOUND BATT INSULATION - WHERE INDICATED * ALL WALLS TO BE FULL HEIGHT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:27 PMA1.2 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715UPPER LEVEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"A1.2 1 UPPER LEVEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" WALL TYPES GENERAL NOTE: CUT & PATCH AT EXISTING WALLS REQUIRING NEW POWER/DATA/SWITCHES/ MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOORS. REFERENCE MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. BREAK ROOM 003 CORRIDOR 001 PLAT ROOM 002 MEETING ROOM 004 @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ GWB - P. 9' - 11 3/8" @ GWB - P. 9' - 11 3/8"UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE 4 A1.3 ALCOVE 005 @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ GWB - P. 7' - 0" HEADER @ 7'-3" HEADER @ 7'-3" @ GWB - P. 7' - 3" OFFICE 101 OPEN OFFICE 100 OFFICE 102@ 2X2 A.C.T. 8' - 0"@ 2X2 A.C.T. 8' - 0" MAINTAIN EXISTING A.P.C. CEILING - REPLACE PANELS AS NECESSARY MAINTAIN EXISTING LIGHTING LAYOUT OPEN OFFICE 200 OFFICE 202 OFFICE 201 @ 2X2 A.C.T. 8' - 0" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 8' - 0" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 8' - 0" HEADER @ 7'-10" EXISTING A.P.C. CEILING @ 7'-3" A.F.F. (VERIFY) NEW A.P.C. CEILING @ 7'-3" A.F.F. CREATE HEADER FROM EXISTING WALL DURING DEMO - INSTALL NEW DRYWALL AS NECESSARY - PAINT 7'-0" A.F.F HEADER EXISTING GYP. BD. - IF SALVAGEABLE, IF NOT, REPLACE GYP. BD. & PAINT AS NECESSARY BREAK ROOM 003 CORRIDOR 001 PLAT ROOM 002 MEETING ROOM 004 @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" 4 A1.3 ALCOVE 005 @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ GWB - P. 7' - 0" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" @ 2X2 A.C.T. 7' - 3" COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:28 PMA1.3 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715REFLECTED CEILING PLANS & DETAILS 1/8" = 1'-0"A1.3 1 LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN (ALTERNATE) 1/8" = 1'-0"A1.3 2 MAIN LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"A1.3 3 SECOND LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A1.3 4 HEADER DETAIL 1/8" = 1'-0"A1.3 5 BASE BID - LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN MAIN LEVEL 100' - 0" SECOND LEVEL 110' - 7 7/8" ROOF LEVEL 121' - 11 3/8" LOWER LEVEL89' - 0"4' - 0"5' - 0" 2' - 0" 5' - 0" FIELD VERIFY 8' - 8 1/2" 8"14' - 2"8" LIGHT WELL RETAINING WALL NEW GUARDRAIL - MATCH EXISTING RETURN 3' - 0" RETURN 3' - 0" PROPOSED GRADING A A 15' - 6" FACE OF BRICK 7' - 0"ALIGNA2.1 5 SIDE WALK ELEVATION = 100' - 0"APPROXIMATE2' - 6"FINISHED FLOOR EXISTING CEILING HEIGHT7' - 3"EXISTING DUCT - TO BE MOVED NEW LIGHT WELL RETAINING WALL NEW WINDOW OPENING SILL HEIGHT5' - 0"4' - 0"LIGHT WELL (ALTERNATE) MAIN FLOOR ROCK MULCH NEW GUARDRAIL @ NORTH & SOUTH OF LIGHT WELL4' - 4"8"4' - 4"8"1' - 10"2' - 6"5' - 6"8"PLANTER BED - BARK MULCH OVER WEED FABRIC CONTINUE CHAMFER ALONG NORTH & SOUTH RETAINING WALLS 6 A2.0 4' - 0"6"1' - 4"1' - 4" 10' - 0" ELEVATION = 89' - 0" LOWER LEVEL3"A2.1 3 A2.1 2 8" CONCRETE WALL W/ #4 @ 16" OC VERT., #4 @16" OC HORIZ., @ CENTERLINE OF WALL A2.1 1 #4 DOWELS TO MATCH VERTICAL REINFORCING CONCRETE FOOTING W/ (2) #4 CONT.3 1/2"BARK MULCH OVER WEED FABRIC 8"8"1"1"1"1" 8" 1"1"8"1"1"NORTH & SOUTH RETAINING WALL CHAMFER BOTH SIDES EAST RETAINING WALL CHAMFER SIDE TOWARDS BUILDING MAIN LEVEL 100' - 0" SECOND LEVEL 110' - 7 7/8" ROOF LEVEL 121' - 11 3/8" LOWER LEVEL89' - 0" REMOVE EXISTING VEGETATION @ WINDOW WELL APPROXIMATE LINE OF LANDSCAPE BURM @ BUILDING APPROXIMATE LINE OF EXISTING GRADE @ SIDEWALK SAW CUT NEW WINDOW OPENING (ALTERNATE)MAINTAIN EXISTING VEGETATION (2) RE-LOCATE IRRIGATION AS REQUIREDSIDE WALK4' - 4" 8" 4' - 4" 8"2' - 4"8"2' - 4"8"6' - 11 1/2"15' - 6"NEW LIGHT WELL RETAINING WALL EXIST. FDN. 1' - 0"10' - 0"5' - 0"2' - 0"5' - 0"8' - 8 1/2"8"x1'-4" CONC. FTG. W/ (2) #4 CONT. EXISTING 2X4 FURRING WALL A A A2.1 4 9 A LIGHT WELL(ALTERNATE)NOTE: EXISTING PATIO PAD TO REMAIN; IF PATIO IS DAMAGED DURING CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO REMOVE IN ITS ENTIRETY, WITH OWNER'S APPROVAL SIDE WALKBARK MULCH OVER WEED FABRIC 6 A2.0 3 A2.0 15' - 6"RETURN3' - 0"9' - 6"RETURN3' - 0"LINE OF SIDEWALK 6' - 9"10' - 0" 4' - 4" 8" 4' - 4" 8"8"8"BUFFALO JUNIPER CATMINT FEATHER REED GRASS BLACK EYED SUSAN LANDSCAPE LEGEND NAME SIZE QUANTITY 2 GAL. 1 GAL. 1 GAL. 1 GAL. 5 2 5 5 TIE INTO EXISTING LANDSCAPE EDGING TIE INTO EXISTING LANDSCAPE EDGING BARK MULCH OVER WEED FABRICROCK MULCH OVER WEED FABRICSOD RESTORE EXISTING LAWN RESTORE EXISTING LAWN PROVIDE DRIP IRRIGATION @ PLANTING BED - PROVIDE PVC SLEEVE THRU NEW RETAINING WALL AS REQ'D NOTE: RE-ROUTE EXISTING IRRIGATION AS REQ'D - PROVIDE IRRIGATION TO NEW PLANTINGS & TURF SOD COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:32 PMA2.0 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715EXTERIOR ELEVATION & DETAILS (ALTERNATE) 1/8" = 1'-0"A2.0 5 EAST ELEVATION - LIGHT WELL (ALTERNATE) 3/8" = 1'-0"A2.0 3 SECTION THROUGH LIGHT WELL (ALTERNATE) APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF NEW WINDOW WELL NORTH-EAST CORNER OF ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A2.0 6 LIGHT WELL RETAINING WALL DETAIL (ALTERNATE) 1/8" = 1'-0"A2.0 4 EAST ELEVATION - DEMOLITION (ALTERNATE) 1/4" = 1'-0"A2.0 1 LOWER LEVEL WINDOW WELL PLAN (ALTERNATE) 1/4" = 1'-0"A2.0 2 MAIN LEVEL WINDOW WELL PLAN (ALTERNATE) 3' - 5"3"MAX 4".1"MAX4"1 1/2"3"1 1/2" 1/2" 'C' CHANNEL (MATCH EXISTING) 3" PLATE STEEL ON PUBLICLY VISIBLE SIDE OF GAURDRAIL 1 1/2" TUBE STEEL TOP/BOTTOM RAIL CONCRETE POST (BEYOND) 10' - 0"8" SILL HT. @ 5'-0" A.F.F. EXISTING FDN. WALL 1' - 0" EXISTING FURRING WALL - REPAIR/REPLACE DRYWALL AS NEEDED & PAINT 1X WOOD SILL TRIM - STAIN PRE. FIN. MTL. FLASHING 6"ROCK MULCH OVER WEED FABRIC PRE. FIN. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT WINDOW - BRONZE ANODIZED TO MATCH EXISTING PRESSURE TREATED 2X EXISTING FDN. WALL 1' - 0" HEAD HT. @ 9'-0" A.F.F. NEW FURRING WALL - 5/8" GYP. BD. - PAINT PRE. FIN. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT WINDOW - BRONZE ANODIZED TO MATCH EXISTING L6 x 4 x 3/8" (LLV) EA. SIDE, W/ 3/4" DIA. EPOXY ANCHOR (5" EMBED) @ 12" O.C., STAGGER SIDES - PAINT 1" NOTE: JAMB DETAIL SIMILAR SEALANT PRE-FINISHED METAL FLASHING 6" EXISTING FDN. WALL 1' - 0"8"DRILL & EPOXY HORIZONTAL DOWELS INTO EXISTING FDN. WALL. EMBED 6" MIN. 8" CONCRETE WALL 12" O.C., TYP. 5' - 0"6" TYP. 1 1/2" TYP.2 1/2" TYP.(E) CONC. WALL 2 1/2"L6x4x3/8 (LLV) EASIDE, W/3/4" DIA. THRU BOLTS; END CONDITION ONLY 2 1/2"L6x4x3/8 (LLV) EASIDE, W/3/4" DIA. EPOXY ANCHOR (5" EMBED) @ 12" O.C., STAGGER SIDES (HILTI-HY 200 EPOXY) SECTION A-A SECTION B-B A A B B CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE: 1. SAWCUT HEAD HORIZ. OVERSAW 6" EA. SIDE 2. INSTALL ANGLES AND THRU BOLTS/EPOXY ANCHORS 3. SAWCUT VERTICAL JAMBS 4. REMOVE WALL SECTION BELOW ANGLES 5. GROUT @ END BEARINGS AS REQ'D COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:33 PMA2.1 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715ALTERNATE DETAILS 1/2" = 1'-0"A2.1 1 GUARDRAIL DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A2.1 2 LIGHT WELL WINDOW SILL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A2.1 3 LIGHT WELL WINDOW HEAD 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A2.1 4 WINDOW WELL + FDN. WALL CONNECTION 3/4" = 1'-0"A2.1 5 ALTERNATE - OPENINGS IN EAST CONCRETE WALL TYPE "A" WOOD FRAME - STAIN WOOD DOOR - STAIN T. TEMPERED FULL-LITE 7' - 2"2"7' - 0"3' - 4" 2" 3' - 0" 2" 5' - 0"4' - 0"2" 4' - 8"2"2"3' - 8"2"TYPE "A" INSULATED GLAZING PRE- FIN. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAME SOLID WOOD CASING - MATCH FRAME SPECIES AND FINISH, TYP. WOOD DOOR - STAIN, TYP. WALL FRAMING GYPSUM BOARD, TYPICAL SOLID WOOD FRAME - STAIN, TYP. JAMB SECTION (HEAD SIM.) EXISTING STRUCTURAL COLUMN EXISTING GYP. BD. BLOCKING AROUND STRUCTURE AS REQ'D GYP. BD. - PAINT RE-INSTALL EXISTING BREAKROOM CABINETS 2' - 0"EXISTINGNEW LAMINATE COUNTERTOP WITH 4" BACKSPLASH - TYP. WALL BASE P.LAM. CORNER FILLER - MATCH EXISTING CABINETS 003 REFRIGERATOR - FROM EXISTING BREAKROOM REINSTALL CABINETS FROM EXISTING BREAKROOM NEW P.LAM. COUNTERTOP WITH 4" BACKSPLASH - TYP. RE-INSTALL EXISTING BREAKROOM SINK WALL BASE P.LAM. CORNER FILLER - MATCH EXISTING CABINETS TYP.3' - 0" A.F.F.A 1X4 WOOD CHAIR RAIL - STAIN WALL BASE GYP. BD. - PAINT GYP. BD. - PAINT 9 A4.0 004 2' - 6"1' - 6"5' - 6"P.LAM UPPER CABINETS - TYP. P.LAM BASE CABINETS - TYP. P.LAM. COUNTERTOP W/ 4" BACKSPLASH - TYP. "EMCO" COAT RACK OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 5' - 0" WALL BASETYP.3' - 0" A.F.F.3' - 0"9 A4.0 10 A4.0 TYP.3' - 0" A.F.F.1X4 WOOD CHAIR RAIL - STAIN WALL BASE GYP. BD. - PAINT GYP. BD. - PAINT 9 A4.0 WALL MTD. T.V. PROVIDED BY OWNERTYP.3' - 0" A.F.F.1X4 WOOD CHAIR RAIL - STAIN GYP. BD. - PAINT WALL BASE GYP. BD. - PAINT 9 A4.0 TYP.3' - 0" A.F.F.1X4 WOOD CHAIR RAIL - STAIN 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP. BD. - PAINT EACH SIDE 2X4 WOOD STUD WALL @ 1'-4" O.C.0' - 4"0' - 4"2' - 0"0' - 6"FUSED WHITE MELAMINE INTERIOR - TYP. FUSED WHITE MELAMINE OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. SHELVING - PROVIDE DRILLED HOLES & MTL. SUPPORTS P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. DOOR MTL. PULL P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. @ EXPOSED EDGES - TYP. CAULK P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. BACKSPLASH CAULK 4" BASE MTL. PULL P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. DOOR P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. DRAWER P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. @ EXPOSED EDGES - TYP. P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. COUNTERTOP 4" P. LAM. OVER 3/4" PARTICLE BD. SIDESPLASH @ WALL BEYOND NOTE: PROVIDE WD. BLCK'G. IN WALL AS REQ'D.3' - 0"1' - 6"2' - 6"1' - 0" 2' - 0" 0' - 3" COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION1/6/2016 1:56:36 PMA4.0 ISSUED FOR BID JANUARY 10, 2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & INTERIOR ELEVATIONSROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM FLOOR NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST CEILING REMARKSNO. NAME FLOOR MAT. BASE MAT. MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIALS FINISH HEIGHT LOWER LEVEL 001 CORRIDOR CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. 7'-3" 002 PLAT ROOM CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. 7'-3" 003 BREAK ROOM V.C.T. 4" RUBBER GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. 7'-3" 004 MEETING ROOM CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. 7'-3" 005 ALCOVE EXISTING EXISTING GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. 7'-3" MAIN LEVEL 100 OPEN OFFICE EXISTING EXISTING GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING EXISTING MATCH EXISTING 101 OFFICE CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. MATCH EXISTING 102 OFFICE CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. MATCH EXISTING SECOND LEVEL 200 OPEN OFFICE CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. MATCH EXISTING 201 OFFICE CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. MATCH EXISTING 202 OFFICE CARPET 4" CARPET GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT GYP. BD. PAINT ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILING MFG. MATCH EXISTING WINDOW SCHEDULE TYPE SIZE TYPE MATERIAL EGRESS AREA REMARKS A 5'-0" x 4'-0"FIXED Aluminum -BRONZE ANODIZED TO MATCH EXISTING WINDOWS DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR Type Mark DOOR FRAME HARDWARE DETAILS REMARKSNO. RM. WIDTH HEIGHT THICK. MAT. FIN. FIRE RAT. MAT. FIN. FIRE RAT. LOCK CLOSER THRESHOLD PUSH/PULL GROUP HEAD JAMB THRESHOLD LOWER LEVEL 002 002 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" WD. STAIN - WD. STAIN - Yes Yes 1 7/A4.0 7/A4.0 FULL LITE TEMPERED GLAZING 003 003 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" WD. STAIN - WD. STAIN - Yes Yes Yes 2 7/A4.0 7/A4.0 FULL LITE TEMPERED GLAZING 004 004 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" WD. STAIN - WD. STAIN - Yes Yes 2 7/A4.0 7/A4.0 FULL LITE TEMPERED GLAZING MAIN LEVEL 102 102 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" WD. STAIN - WD. STAIN - Yes Yes 3 7/A4.0 7/A4.0 FULL LITE TEMPERED GLAZING SECOND LEVEL 201 201 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" WD. STAIN - WD. STAIN - Yes Yes 3 7/A4.0 7/A4.0 FULL LITE TEMPERED GLAZING 202 202 A 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" WD. STAIN - WD. STAIN - Yes Yes 3 7/A4.0 7/A4.0 FULL LITE TEMPERED GLAZING 1/4" = 1'-0" DOOR TYPES 1/4" = 1'-0" WINDOW TYPES 3" = 1'-0"A4.0 7 DOOR DETAIL 3" = 1'-0"A4.0 8 TYP. COLUMN WRAP DETAIL 3/8" = 1'-0"A4.0 1 BREAKROOM - RM. 003 - NORTH 3/8" = 1'-0"A4.0 2 BREAKROOM - RM. 003 - WEST 3/8" = 1'-0"A4.0 3 MEETING ROOM - RM. 004 - EAST 3/8" = 1'-0"A4.0 5 MEETING ROOM - RM. 004 - NORTH 3/8" = 1'-0"A4.0 6 MEETING ROOM - RM. 004 - SOUTH 3/8" = 1'-0"A4.0 4 MEETING ROOM - RM. 004 - WEST 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.0 9 CHAIR RAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A4.0 10 CABINET SECTION ** REPAIR OR REPLACE ANY DAMAGED DRYWALL. PAINT EXISTING AND NEW DRYWALL SURFACES. DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AIR TERMINALS, EQUIPMENT & SPECIALTIES NOTE: UNINSULATED/UNLINED DUCTWORK INCLUDES: INSULATED DUCTWORK INCLUDES: MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND - ALL INTERIOR SUPPLY DUCTWORK - ALL INTERIOR RETURN DUCTWORK INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK MAY BE USED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION FOR A MAXIMUM OF 5 FT. LENGTH TO EACH DIFFUSER/REGISTER/ GRILLE. SUPPLY AIR TERMINAL (NEW, EXIST., DEMO.) RETURN AIR TERMINAL (NEW, EXIST., DEMO.) EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL (NEW, EXIST., DEMO.) PUMP P.O.D.C. - POINT OF DISCONNECTION P.O.C. - POINT OF CONNECTION SD-1 220 TYPE OF EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT NUMBER (REFER TO SCHEDULE) AIR TERMINAL NUMBER AIR TERMINAL CFM (REFER TO SCHEDULE) SWITCH T'STAT. (ELEC./PNEU.) SIDEWALL AIR TERMINAL WALL LOUVER DIFFUSER/GRILLE TAG EQUIPMENT TAG TT S EF 1 PLUMBING SYMBOLS LEGEND PIPING FITTINGS, VALVES & SPECIALTIES DOMESTIC PIPING TYPES GENERAL PIPING VTR M M or or or or or or or or or or or or FT P1P-1 GLOBE VALVE 3-WAY (ELECTRIC) THIS IS A STANDARDIZED SYMBOLS LEGEND, ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT APPEAR ON OR WITHIN THIS SET OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. VENT THRU ROOF STRAINER W/ BLOW-OFF 3-WAY (PNEU. MTR.) 3-WAY (PNEUMATIC) PRESSURE GAUGE TEMP. GAUGE SENSOR (TEMP./FLOW) FLEX. CONNECTION SOLENOID GATE VALVE WALL HYDRANT OR HOSE BIBB FLOAT VALVE BALANCING VALVE DRAIN PLUG VALVE CHECK VALVE STRAINER PRESS. REDUCING 2-WAY (ELECTRIC) 2-WAY (PNEU. MTR.) 2-WAY (SOLENOID) PNEUMATIC MOTOR ANGLE VALVE EXIST. FIXTURE TO REMAIN EXIST. FIXT. TO BE REMOVEDNEW PLUMBING FIXTURE FIXT. NUMBER - SEE SCHED. GATE VALVE BALL VALVE CROSS IN HORIZ. RUN 90° AND 45° ELBOWS END CAP CONNECTION BELL AND SPIGOT UNION FITTING BRANCH TEE TURNED UP BRANCH TEE TURNED DN. DIRECTION OF FLOW ELBOW TURNED DN. TEE TURNED DN. DROP IN HORIZ. RUN TEE TURNED UP ELBOW TURNED UP REDUCER FITTING TEE IN HORIZ. RUN BRANCH TEE W/ OFFSET PUMP FIRE EXTINGUISHER FIRE SPRINKLER HEAD DISCONNECTION P.O.D.C. - POINT OF P.O.C. - POINT OF CONNECTION DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER BUTTERFLY VALVE SANITARY WASTE VENTHW CW V SAN PIPING PHASE EXISTING PIPING NEW ABOVE FLOOR PIPING TEMPORARY PIPING DEMOLISHED PIPINGNEW UNDERFLOOR PIPING or STRAINER 1 1/2" SANITARY WASTE FROM FIXTURE SLOPE AT 1/4" PER FOOT FOR HORIZONTAL SECTIONS USE PROVIDED COUPLING FOR PUMP CONNECTION 6" MIN 1 1/2" VENT PIPING UP CONNECT TO VENT FROM SINK IN WALL USE PROVIDED COUPLING FOR PUMP CONNECTION 1" DISCHARGE UP TO CEILING USE PROVIDED COUPLING FOR PUMP CONNECTION. CAPPED ALTERNATE INLETS SECURE TO BASE OF CASEWORK USING PROVIDED HARDWARE EP 1 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:15 AM01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING LEGENDS AND SCHEDULESMP1.0 DRAWING LIST MP2.0 LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS MP2.1 MAIN LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS MP2.2 UPPER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS MP1.0 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING LEGENDS AND SCHEDULES S-1 JUST SLX-2019-A-GR 1-COMP SINK 10-1/2"DEPTH STAINLESS STEEL JUST FAUCET #JTR-50W4 1/2" 1/2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2"PROVIDE W/ JUST J-35 STRAINER, 4" WRIST BLADE HANDLES, 3-HOLE PUNCHING AND J-35-SSF STRAINER. CW HW SAN VENT PLAN CODE MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER ITEM MATERIAL & FINISH TRIM ROUGH-IN SIZE REMARKS PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE SRG - 1 KRUEGER 5480 RETURN GRILLE 12" x 8"STEEL BAKED ENAMEL SEE PLANS IN DUCT 38 DEG FIXED DEFLECTION, 3/8" BLADE SPACING. FIELD PAINTED BY G.C. RG -KRUEGER 6490 CEILING RETURN SEE SCHED BELOW STEEL BAKED ENAMEL SEE PLANS IN DUCT SEE SCHED BELOW CD -KRUEGER 1240 CEILING SUPPLY SEE SCHED BELOW STEEL BAKED ENAMEL SEE PLANS IN DUCT 4 WAY THROW CEILING DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE CORES. SEE SCHD BELOW PLAN CODE MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER FUNCTION FACE SIZE MATERIAL FINISH CFM VOLUME DAMPER REMARKS GRILLE - REGISTER - DIFFUSER SCHEDULE EP-1 SANIFLOW SANISWIFT 3600 18 14 0.3 115 1 2" INLET. 1"OUTLET. 1 1/2" VENT. SEE NOTES HP VOLT PH PLAN CODE MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER RPM GPM FT OF HEAD ELECTRICAL REMARKS SUMP PUMP SCHEDULE CD - 12 24" x 24"12" DIA 350 - 600 CD - 10 24" x 24"10" DIA 200 - 350 CD - 8 24" x 24"8" DIA 100 - 200 CD - 6 24" x 24"6" DIA 0-100 PLAN CODE FACE SIZE NECK SIZE CFM RANGE CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER SIZING RG - 12 24" x 24"12" DIA 350 - 600 RG - 10 24" x 24"10" DIA 200 - 350 RG - 8 24" x 24"8" DIA 100 - 200 RG - 6 24" x 24"6" DIA 0-100 PLAN CODE FACE SIZE NECK SIZE CFM RANGE CEILING RETURN DIFFUSER SIZING NOTES: 1: PROVIDE ALL DUCT TRANSITIONS TO AND FROM GRILLES/REGISTERS/DIFFUSERS AS REQUIRED. 2: ALL GRILLES AND REGISTERS TO BE OFF WHITE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXACT BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND CEILING TYPES AND PROVE THE CORRECT FRAMES FOR ALL AIR DIFFUSION PRODUCTS AS REQUIRED. 4: PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS FOR CONNECTION TO ALL GRD'S. 6: SEE DRAWINGS FOR FURTHER GRD REQUIREMENTS. 7: CONSULT ARCHITECT AND OWNER FOR THE SALVAGE AND REUSE OF EXISTING MECHANICAL FIXTURES. MATCH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON A PER ROOM BASIS. 8: MANUFACTURE TO BE KRUEGER, MCQUAY, OR NAILOR EQUAL. 8:FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REVIEW ALL ARCHITECURAL, STRUCTUAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL PLANS PRIOR TO BIDDING. ROUTE PIPING ACCORDINGLY. 7:THIS IS A REMODEL TO AN EXISTING BUILDING. ADD/RELOCATE SPRINKLER HEADS AND ALARM SYSTEM FOR LAYOUT OF NEW WALLS, CEILING, ETC. CONNECT TO EXISTING SYSTEM. 6: NO INSTALLATION OF ANY EQUIPMENT IS TO BEGIN PRIOR TO APPROVAL OF PLANS AND ISSUANCE OF A PERMIT BY THE CITY OF BOZEMAN. 5: SYSTEM TEST SHALL BE WITNESSED BY BOZEMAN PERSONNEL PRIOR TO ANY PORTION BEING CONCEALED -- GIVE 48 HOURS NOTICE. 4: SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE REUSED OR MATCH EXISTING PER ARCHITECT APPROVAL AND MEET CODE. 3: 1" THRU 2" PIPE SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 WITH SCREWED FITTINGS. 2 1/2" THRU 4" PIPE SHALL BE SCHEDULE 10 WITH GROOVED FITTINS. 2: SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE A HYDRAULIC DENSITY AS REQUIRED BY CODE 1:SPRINKLER AND ALARM SHALL COMPLY WITH INSURANCE SERVICES OFFICE REQUIREMENTS, CURRENT N.F.P.A. AND BOZEMAN MUNICIPAL CODE. FIRE PROTECTION NOTES NOTE:CONSULT ARCHITECT AND OWNER FOR THE SALVAGE AND REUSE OF EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES. IF EXISTING SINK TO BE REUSED, PROVIDE WITH FINE STRAINER. 12" = 1'-0" PUMP DETAIL UH-2 RADIANT SYSTEMS, INC.C-9012 120 900 7.5 INSTALL PER MANUFACTURE... UH-1 RADIANT SYSTEMS, INC.C-4512 120 450 3.8 INSTALL PER MANUFACTURE... VOLTAGE WATTAGE AMPERES PLAN CODE MANUFACTURE MODEL NUMBER ELECTRICAL REMARKS UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE NOTE:INSTALL PER MANUFACTURE RECOMENDATION AND DETAIL BELOW. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 21 2 1 9876 A B C D E 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 10 10 10 10 9876 A B C D E 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 8 RG-10 330 CFM CD-8 110 CFM CD-8 110 CFM CD-8 110 CFM CD-6 75 CFM CD-6 75 CFM CD-6 60 CFM CD-6 65 CFM CD-6 65 CFM RG-8 195 CFM CD-6 65 CFM RG-8 150 CFM RG-6 60 CFM 12"x12" 12"x12"8"ø 8"ø8"ø 10"ø 8"ø 6"ø 6"ø8"x8"6"ø 6"x6" 6"ø 6"ø 8"x8"6"ø 8"x8" 9 11 11 11 11 SE 1 1"ø SAN 2"ø V 1 1/2"ø SAN 1/2"ø HW1/2"ø CW COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:18 AM01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANSMP2.0 1/4" = 1'-0"MP2.0 1 LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING KEYNOTES Key Value Keynote Text 7 INSTALL RETURN GRILLE IN CEILING GRID AND INSTALL DAMPER AT GRILLE. ATTACH TO EXISTING DUCT ABOVE. 8 ROUTE 1/2" HW/CW AND 2" VENT PIPING UP AND CONNECT TO EXISTING SYSTEMS SUPPLYING RESTROOM ABOVE. MAKE CONNECTION IN LOWER LEVEL CEILING SPACE. 9 (ALT 1) INSTALL NEW DUCTWORK IN APPROXIAMTE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY AND MATCH EXISTING DUCT SIZE. 10 DEMO FIRE SPRINKLER AND PIPING UP TO MAIN AND CAP. 11 INSTALL NEW FIRE SPRINKLER IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION SHOWN AND CONNECTING TO NEAREST EXISTING FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING. MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING KEYNOTES Key Value Keynote Text 1 REMOVE AND SALVAGE AIR TERMINAL AND EQUIPMENT FOR REUSE. DEMO EXISTING DUCTWORK APPROXIMATLY BACK TO P.O.D.C. SYMBOL. 2 REMOVE SIDEWALL GRILLE AND CAP DUCTWORK AT NEAREST MAIN. SALVAGE GRILLE FOR REUSE IF NEEDED. 3 EXISTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN. 4 (ALT 1) DEMO DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT. 5 ROUTE 1" SAN UP TO CEILING AND OVER TO EXISTING SAN PIPING. USE 45 DEG OR LONG RADIUS 90 DEG FITTINGS FOR ALL TURNS. 6 INSTALL AIR TERMINAL AND ROUTE FLEX DUCT TO EXISTING SYSTEM. MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER TO BE INSTALLED APPROXIMATLY WHERE INDICATED ON DUCT. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK DEPICTED IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH ALL ASSOCIATED FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES WITH REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND LIGHTING LAYOUT. 3 COORDINATE HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AS REQUIRED. 4 ALL CEILING DIFFUSERS TO BE 4-WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5 ALL DUCTS ABOVE CORRIDOR AREAS TO BE MINIMUM 24 GAUGE SHEET METAL. 12 SEAL ALL MECHANICAL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH UL-APPROVED FIRE RATED SYSTEM. 13 VERIFY LOCATIONS OF REUSED AND NEW AIR TERMINALS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1 PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK DEPICTED IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH ALL ASSOCIATED FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2 COORDINATE HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AND EXISTING BUILDING AS REQUIRED. 3 REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 4 ALL VALVES LESS THAN 2" SHALL BE BALL VALVES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5 INSULATION ON ALL DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A CONTINUOUS VAPOR BARRIER. OVERSIZE HANGERS FOR INSULATION SO NO PENETRATION OF THE VAPOR BARRIER OCCURS. PROVIDE INSERTS AND SADDLES AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT INSULATION DAMAGE FROM SUPPORTS. 6 NO DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SHALL BE ROUTED IN ANY EXTERIOR WALLS. 7 PROVIDE CLEANOUTS ON ALL LINES SERVING SINKS AND URINALS. 1/4" = 1'-0"MP2.0 3 LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REMODEL PLAN REF.1 2 3 3 33 3 7654 A B C D 2 2 4 4 4 7654 A B C D 3 3 3 3 3 55 6 6 CD EX CD EX CD EX CD EX SWG EX SRG-1 50 CFM CD-6 50 CFM CD-6 50 CFM 6"ø 8"x4"8"x8"14"x10"7 3 EXH EX SRG-1 150 CFM COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:20 AM01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715MAIN LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANSMP2.1 1/4" = 1'-0"MP2.1 1 MAIN LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"MP2.1 2 MAIN LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REMODEL PLAN MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING KEYNOTES Key Value Keynote Text 1 REMOVE AND SALVAGE AIR TERMINAL AND EQUIPMENT. DEMO DUCTWORK BACK TO P.O.D.C. SYMBOL. 2 REMOVE AIR TERMINAL AND SALVAGE FOR REUSE IN NEW LOCATION. DUCTWORK TO REMIAN FOR CONNECTION AT NEW LOCATION. SEE 2/MP2.1 FOR NEW LOCATION. 3 EXISTING AIR TERMINAL TO REMAIN. 4 EXISTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN. 5 INSTALL AIR TERMINAL AND ROUTE FLEX DUCT TO EXISTING SYSTEM. MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER TO BE INSTALLED APPROXIMATLY WHERE INDICATED ON DUCT. 6 INSTALL SIDWALL RETURN AND DUCT DOWN TO EXISTING RETURN DUCTWORK BELOW. INSTALL MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER AT CONNECTION TO EXISTING DUCT. 7 INSTALL SALVAGED AIR TERMINAL IN NEW CEILING GRID. EXTEND OR REMOVE EXISTING CONNECTED DUCTOWRK TO ACCOMIDATE NEW LOCATION. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK DEPICTED IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH ALL ASSOCIATED FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES WITH REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND LIGHTING LAYOUT. 3 COORDINATE HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AS REQUIRED. 4 ALL CEILING DIFFUSERS TO BE 4-WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5 ALL DUCTS ABOVE CORRIDOR AREAS TO BE MINIMUM 24 GAUGE SHEET METAL. 12 SEAL ALL MECHANICAL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH UL-APPROVED FIRE RATED SYSTEM. 13 VERIFY LOCATIONS OF REUSED AND NEW AIR TERMINALS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1 PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK DEPICTED IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH ALL ASSOCIATED FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2 COORDINATE HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AND EXISTING BUILDING AS REQUIRED. 3 REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 4 ALL VALVES LESS THAN 2" SHALL BE BALL VALVES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5 INSULATION ON ALL DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A CONTINUOUS VAPOR BARRIER. OVERSIZE HANGERS FOR INSULATION SO NO PENETRATION OF THE VAPOR BARRIER OCCURS. PROVIDE INSERTS AND SADDLES AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT INSULATION DAMAGE FROM SUPPORTS. 6 NO DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SHALL BE ROUTED IN ANY EXTERIOR WALLS. 7 PROVIDE CLEANOUTS ON ALL LINES SERVING SINKS AND URINALS. TT TT 1 1 1 1 11 2 3 987 C D E 4 4 4 7 987 C D E 5 5 55 55 55 55 6 CD-8 110 CFMRG-10 275 CFM RG-8 105 CFM RG-6 75 CFM CD-6 75 CFM CD-8 110 CFM CD-8 110 CFM CD-8 110 CFM CD-8 110 CFM RG-10 275 CFM 6"x6"8"x6" CD-8 105 CFM 6"x6" UH 1 UH 1 UH 2 8 8 8 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:22 AM01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715UPPER LEVEL MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANSMP2.2 1/4" = 1'-0"MP2.2 1 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"MP2.2 2 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REMODEL PLAN MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING KEYNOTES Key Value Keynote Text 1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE AIR TERMINAL AND EQUIPMENT FOR REUSE. DEMO DUCTWORK BACK P.O.D.C. SYMBOL. 2 REMOVE AIR TERMINAL AND SALVAGE FOR REUSE IN NEW CEILING GRID. DUCTWORK TO REMAIN FOR CONNECTION AT NEW LOCATION. SEE 2/MP2.2 FOR NEW LOCATION. 3 REMOVE SINK. DEMO HW/CW/V PIPING AND CAP IN CEILING. DEMO SAN PIPING AND CAP IN FLOOR. 4 EXISTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN. 5 INSTALL AIR TERMINAL AND ROUTE FLEX DUCT TO EXISTING SYSTEM. MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER TO BE INSTALLED APPROXIMATLY WHERE INDICATED ON DUCT. 6 INSTALL SALVAGED AIR TERMINAL IN NEW CEILING GRID. RECONNECT TO EXISTING DUCTWORK. 7 REMOVE THERMOSTAT AND DEMO ASSOCIATED WIRING. THERMOSTAT TO BE SALVAGED AND INSTALLED IN NEW LOCATION SERVING SAME HEATING COIL. 8 INSTALL UNIT HEATER IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION. CONNECT TO THERMOSTAT SERVING AREA. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK DEPICTED IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH ALL ASSOCIATED FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2 COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES WITH REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND LIGHTING LAYOUT. 3 COORDINATE HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AS REQUIRED. 4 ALL CEILING DIFFUSERS TO BE 4-WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5 ALL DUCTS ABOVE CORRIDOR AREAS TO BE MINIMUM 24 GAUGE SHEET METAL. 12 SEAL ALL MECHANICAL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH UL-APPROVED FIRE RATED SYSTEM. 13 VERIFY LOCATIONS OF REUSED AND NEW AIR TERMINALS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1 PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK DEPICTED IN THESE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH ALL ASSOCIATED FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOF AS REQUIRED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 2 COORDINATE HVAC AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AND EXISTING BUILDING AS REQUIRED. 3 REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 4 ALL VALVES LESS THAN 2" SHALL BE BALL VALVES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5 INSULATION ON ALL DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A CONTINUOUS VAPOR BARRIER. OVERSIZE HANGERS FOR INSULATION SO NO PENETRATION OF THE VAPOR BARRIER OCCURS. PROVIDE INSERTS AND SADDLES AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT INSULATION DAMAGE FROM SUPPORTS. 6 NO DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SHALL BE ROUTED IN ANY EXTERIOR WALLS. 7 PROVIDE CLEANOUTS ON ALL LINES SERVING SINKS AND URINALS. MISCELLANEOUS LEGEND COMMUNICATION DEVICES FIRE ALARM DEVICES ESV F F F M DSD S V PP C J PP OS OS POWER DEVICES M T LIGHTING DEVICES R F F F V W C R B NA D ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS ELECTRICAL LEGEND T INTERIOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS AS F F F FACP LAA FS TS PS ARRP ARMP CB CO2 CO2 M JJ THERMOSTAT BY MC, ROUGH-IN BY EC PAD MOUNTED UTILITY TRANSFORMER NORMAL CIRCUIT CONCEALED IN WALL OR EXPOSED UNDERGROUND OR BURIED CIRCUIT HOMERUN TO ELECTRICAL PANEL NUMBER OF HASH MARKS INDICATES NUMBER OF CURRENT CARRYING CONDUCTORS. NO MARKS INDICATES TWO. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR NOT SHOWN BUT SHALL BE INCLUDED IN ALL CONDUITS. W/ WITH AC ABOVE COUNTER EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (E) EXISTING (R) RELOCATED (N) NEW DEVICE C CONDUIT BFG BELOW FINISHED GRADE UC UNDER COUNTER WP WEATHER PROOF MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR CEILING MOUNTED SPEAKER REFER TO ELECTRICAL NOTES COMBINATION WALL SPEAKER/ CLOCK UNIT MANUAL PULL STATION AUDIO/VISUAL HORN/STOBE DEVICE VISUAL STROBE DEVICE MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER SMOKE DETECTOR HEAT DETECTOR CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR SPRINKLER CONNECTION, PRESSURE SWITCH SPRINKLER CONNECTION, TAMPER SWITCH SPRINKLER CONNECTION, FLOW SWITCH SPRINKLER CONNECTION, LOW AIR ALARM DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE SMOKE DAMPER FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR ELEVATOR SHAFT VENT, CONNECT TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VOICE DEVICE JACK, BOX INDICATES FLOOR MOUNTING CABLE TV JACK INTERCOM JACK WALL MOUNTED SPEAKER WALL MOUNTED VOLUME CONTROLLER WALL CLOCK DUPLEX RECEPTACLE SUBSCRIPT INDICATES TYPE: DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, SUBSCRIPT ABOVE INDICATE TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN FLOOR BOX DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN FLOOR BOX SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE MOTOR CONNECTION VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MUSHROOM HEAD PUSH BUTTON SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE IN FLOOR BOX PHOTO CELL WALL MOUNTED CLOCK HANGER/ POWER RECEPTACLE CORNER WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, STYLE 1 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, STYLE 2 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, STYLE 3 FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH WP WEATHERPROOF GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER AC ABOVE COUNTER IG ISOLATED GROUND TR TAMPER RESISTANT WR WEATHER RESISTANT FILLED CENTER INDICATES GFCI DEVICE CO2 DETECTOR BY MC, ROUGH-IN BY EC CONTACTOR MANUAL MOTOR STARTER SINGLE POLE SWITCH, SUBSCRIPT INDICATES TYPE: P PILOT LIGHT 2 2 POLE MC MOMENTARY CONTACT 3 3-WAY 4 4-WAY K KEYED D DIMMER LV LOW VOLTAGE T TIMER, 1 HOUR TIMER, MOTOR RATED FOR EXHAUST FANS OS OCCUPANCY SENSOR LAY-IN OR RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT FIXTURE DIRECT/ INDIRECT FLUORESCENT PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURE. SURFACE MOUNTED OR CHAIN HUNG STRIP FIXTURE WALL BRACKET FLUORESCENT FIXTURE SURFACE MOUNTED CYLINDER FIXTURE WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE FILLED CENTER OR SLASH INDICATES FIXTURE IS AN EMERGENCY DEVICE WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK OR CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY POWER. EXIT SIGN, BRACKET INDICATES WALL MOUNTING. NUMBER OF FACES AND DIRECTION INDICATED BY FILLED AREAS. DOUBLE HEAD WALL MOUNTED BATTERY PACK POWERED EGRESS FIXTURE. SQUARE HEAD POLE MOUNTED SITE LIGHT FIXTURE. ROUND HEAD POLE MOUNTED SITE LIGHT FIXTURE. RELAY 1'-6"FINISHED CEILING FINISHED FLOOR COD COD COD TOD 44"54"74" TO TOP OF TRIMBOD 80" MINIMUM TO BOTTOMAC = MINIMUM 4" BOVE BACKSPLASH TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE.84" AFF TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE OR 6"BELOW CEILING TO TOP OF DEVICE,WHICHEVER IS LOWER.WATT MISER WITH WATT(S) WIRE VESTIBULE VOLT(S) UNIT HEATER UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND TYPICAL TELEVISION TELEPHONE BACK BOARD SWITCH STORAGE STEEL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS SWITCH, PILOT SOLID NEUTRAL SHEET SUPPLY FAN SERVICE RAPID START RESTROOMS ROOM(S) ROOM REQUIRED REFRIGERANT REFRIGERATOR RECEPTACLES RECEPTACLE RETURN AIR FAN PROVIDE & INSTALL PRODUCE PREPARATION PANEL PHASE OVERHEAD OFFICE OVER CURRENT PROTECTION MFG NUMBER NOT IN CONTRACT MANUFACTURER MOUNTED MAIN PANEL MAIN LUGS ONLY MINIMUM MECHANICAL MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MOMENTARY CONTACT LIGHT WHITE LIGHTS KILOWATT(S) KILIVOLT AMPERE(S) KITCHEN WM W/ W W VEST V UH UGT UGE UG TYP TV TBD SW STOR STL STD SPECS SP SN SHT SF SER RS RR RMS RM REQD REFR REF RECPTS RECP RAF P/I PROD PREP PNL P OH OFF OCP NO NIC MTD MP MLO MIN MECH MCB MOC LW LTS KW KVA KIT JUNCTION BOX INCORPORATED HERTZ HOT WATER HEATER HEATERS HOT WATER HEIGHT HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM HORSEPOWER GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER FOOT FULL LOAD AMPS FIXTURE FACILITY FIRE ALARM EXTERIOR ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ETCETERA ENGINEER EMERGENCY ESTIMATED MAXIMUM DEMAND ELECTRIC EXHAUST FAN DRAWING DISCONNECT DIAMETER COOL WHITE CABLE TELEVISION COPPER CONTRACTOR CONDENSER COMPRESSOR COMMISSARY CIRCUIT CABINET UNIT HEATER CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CIRCUIT BREAKER CONDUIT BRITISH THERMAL UNIT/HOUR BREAKER BUILDING APPROXIMATE APPLIANCE AMPERE(S) AIR HANDLING UNIT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR ADMINISTRATION ADJUSTABLE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSING UNIT AMP(S) J-BOX INC HZ HWH HTRS HW HT HID HPS HP GFCI FT FLA FIX FAC FA EXT EWC ETC ENGR EMER EMD ELEC EF DWG DISC DIA CW CTV CU CONTR COND COMP COMM CCT CUH CFM CB C BTU/HR BRK BLDG APPROX APPL AMP AHU AFF ADMIN ADJ ACU ACCU A ALUMINUMAL VOLT AMPERESVA ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CWP COLD WATER PUMP HWP HOT WATER PUMP MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANELMDP SDP SUB DISTRIBUTION PANEL KILOHERTZKHZ CCTV CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION COM COMMUNICATION FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL MFA MINIMUM FEEDER AMPACITY RA REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR GENERAL CONTRACTORGC MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR XFMR TRANSFORMER SPST SWITCH, SINGLE POLE- SINGLE THROW 1 48"COD AQUASTAT BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR, WIRED BY EC. SITE GROUND MOUNTED FLOOD FIXTURE REMOTE DOUBLE HEAD EGRESS FIXTURE AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE - REMOTE STATION AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE - MASTER STATION WALL SCONCE FIXTURE COD 36"AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE WM WIRE MOLD GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GND GROUND UG UNDER GROUND BOD BOTTOM OF DEVICE TOD TOP OF DEVICE COD CENTER OF DEVICE BOF BOTTOM OF FIXTURE AUDIO SPEAKER DEVICE CEILING MOUNTED AUDIO/VISUAL PEAKER/STROBE DEVICE CEILING MOUNTED AUDIO SPEAKER DEVICE ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE BY EC FOR FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, CEILING MOUNTED. DEVICE AND COVER SHALL MATCH CEILING FINISH SPECIAL PURPOSE CONNECTION, BRACKET INDICATES WALL MOUNTING, BOX INDICATES FLOOR MOUNTING COMBINATION VOICE/ DATA DEVICE JACKS, BOX INDICATES FLOOR MOUNTING SWITCHED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, BOX INDICATES DEVICE LOCATED IN FLOOR BOX 208V SINGLE PHASE RECEPTACLE, CONFIGURATION NOTED ON PLANS 208V THREE PHASE RECEPTACLE, CONFIGURATION NOTED ON PLANS OCCUPANCY SENSOR POWER PACK, BOX INDICATES WALL MOUNTING JUNCTION BOX, BRACKET INDICATES WALL MOUNTING, BOX INDICATES FLOOR MOUNTING ELECTRICAL PANEL - SEE PANEL SCHEDULES FOR MOUNTING CONFIGURATION RECESSED DOWN LIGHT, HALF MOON INDICATES WALL WASH TRIM AND DIRECTION. S C SSC C FSD FAA OS OS PP 1 2 3 VFD SD HD CO COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:15 AME1.0 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND SCHEDULESDRAWING LIST E1.0 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND SCHEDULES E1.1 OVERALL ELECTRICAL PLANS ED2.0 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANS ED2.1 MAIN LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANS ED2.2 UPPER LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANS E2.0 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANS E2.1 MAIN LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANS E2.2 UPPER LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANS LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE CALLOUT MANUFACTURER MODEL MOUNTIN G LAMP ELECTRICAL DATA DESCRIPTION C1 GOTHAM EVO 30/15 6ARFL MVOLT EZB RECESSED LED 120 V/1-28 VA CAN LIGHT WITH DIMMER E1 PHILIPS DAY-BRITE CF2GPF232UNV-E5ST RECESSED (2)32WT8 120 V/1-64 VA VOLUMETRIC RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURE W/ EM BALLAST G1 PHILIPS DAY-BRITE CF2GPF232UNV-EB10R RECESSED (2)32WT8 120 V/1-64 VA VOLUMETRIC RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURE. X1 LIGHTALARMS GRAN N R W LED 120 V/1-0 VA SINGLE FACE EXIT SIGN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER LIST: C1: LITHONIA, COOPER G1: LITHONIA, COOPER X1: LITHONIA, COOPER 987654321 A B C D E CLINIC PANEL PANEL 987654321 A B C D E PANEL C PANEL D 987654321 A B C D E PANEL PANEL COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:17 AME1.1 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715OVERALL ELECTRICAL PLANS 1/8" = 1'-0"E1.1 1 LOWER LEVEL PANEL LOCATION 1/8" = 1'-0"E1.1 2 MAIN LEVEL PANEL LOCATION 1/8" = 1'-0"E1.1 3 UPPER LEVEL PANEL LOCATION ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES 1 IN ALL ROOMS WHERE FIXTURES WERE SALVAGED, REPLACEMENT FIXTURES SHALL BE EXCLUSIVELY NEW FIXTURES. THERE SHALL NOT BE A COMBINATION OF NEW AND REUSED LIGHT FIXTURES IN THE SAME ROOM. 2 PROVIDE POWER FOR ALL NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES VIA JUNCTION BOX THAT THE ORIGINAL LIGHTING CIRCUITS WERE REMOVED TO. SEE DEMOLITION PLANS. SSSFF F S SSSF1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 11 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 1 9876 A B C D E 5 1 1 6 1 CLINIC PANEL 1 2 2 4 9876 A B C D E COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:24 AMED2.0 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANS 1/4" = 1'-0"ED2.0 1 LOWER LEVEL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION PLAN ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES 1 REMOVE DEVICES(S), CONDUIT, AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX. 2 EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN. 3 RELOCATE PHONE/DATA INTO WALL. 4 RMEOVE ALL LIGHTING, SWITCHING, AND CONDUITS BACK TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX. 5 REMOVE SURFACE-MOUNTED RACEWAY. 6 REMOVE DEVICE AND STORE FOR REUSE DURING REMODEL. PRESERVE EXISTING WIRING FOR REUSE. SEE NEW CONSTRUCTION PLANS FOR NEW LOCATION. ELECTRICAL GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES 1 FOR ALL LIGHTING DEMOLITION, SALVAGE FIXTURES AND GIVE OWNER FIRST RIGHT OF REFUSAL. 2 MARK AND TAG ALL JUNCTION BOXES WHERE POWER IS SUPPLIED FROM FOR REUSE DURING NEW CONSTRUCTION. 1/4" = 1'-0"ED2.0 2 LOWER LEVEL LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN 1 2 7654 A B C D 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 7654 A B C D 1 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:25 AMED2.1 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715MAIN LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANS 1/4" = 1'-0"ED2.1 1 MAIN LEVEL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"ED2.1 2 MAIN LEVEL LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES 1 REMOVE DEVICES(S), CONDUIT, AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX. 2 EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES 1 FOR ALL LIGHTING DEMOLITION, SALVAGE FIXTURES AND GIVE OWNER FIRST RIGHT OF REFUSAL. 2 MARK AND TAG ALL JUNCTION BOXES WHERE POWER IS SUPPLIED FROM FOR REUSE DURING NEW CONSTRUCTION. AC AC F1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 22 3 2 987 C D E 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 987 C D E 1 1 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:26 AMED2.2 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715UPPER LEVEL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANSELECTRICAL KEYNOTES 1 REMOVE DEVICES(S), CONDUIT, AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX. 2 EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN. 3 RELOCATE PHONE/DATA INTO WALL. ELECTRICAL GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES 1 FOR ALL LIGHTING DEMOLITION, SALVAGE FIXTURES AND GIVE OWNER FIRST RIGHT OF REFUSAL. 2 MARK AND TAG ALL JUNCTION BOXES WHERE POWER IS SUPPLIED FROM FOR REUSE DURING NEW CONSTRUCTION. 1/4" = 1'-0"ED2.2 1 UPPER LEVEL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS DEMOLITION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"ED2.2 2 UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN ACAC ACAC AC AC AC ACAC F F FFUC60" 60" 60" 60" OS OS OS OS BREAK ROOM 003 MEETING ROOM 004 CORRIDOR 001 PLAT ROOM 002 ALCOVE 005 9876 A B C D E 1 BREAK ROOM 003 MEETING ROOM 004 CORRIDOR 001 PLAT ROOM 002 ALCOVE 005 9876 A B C D E a b dc a a a a c a a c b b b b b b b b c c ddd a,b,c,d a a a b b b b a b E1 G1 G1G1 E1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1G1 G1G1 E1 G1 G1E1G1G1 G1 G1 G1E1 G1 G1 G1 X1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 2 2 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:18 AME2.0 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANS 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.0 1 LOWER LEVEL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS REMODEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.0 2 BASEMENT LIGHTING REMODEL PLAN ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES 1 PLACE EXISTING DEVICE IN NEW LOCATION SHOWN. RECONNECT TO EXISTING WIRING. 2 PROVIDE LABEL WITH GREEN LETTERING, "DAYLIGHT ZONE" ON SWITCHPLATE ABOVE SWITCH. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES 1 CIRCUIT ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX PRESERVED DURING DEMOLTION. 2 CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHALL BE LEVITON ODC05-MDW OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 3 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCHES SHALL BE LEVITON ODS15-ID OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. ELECTRICAL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES 1 CIRCUIT ALL DEVICES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX PRESERVED DURING DEMOLITION. GROUP CIRCUITS AS SHOWN WITH CIRCUITING. REF.OS OS OFFICE 101 OFFICE 102 OPEN OFFICE 100 7654 A B C D OFFICE 101 OFFICE 102 OPEN OFFICE 100 7654 A B C D G1 G1 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:20 AME2.1 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715MAIN LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANSELECTRICAL LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES 1 CIRCUIT ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX PRESERVED DURING DEMOLTION. 2 CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHALL BE LEVITON ODC05-MDW OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 3 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCHES SHALL BE LEVITON ODS15-ID OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. ELECTRICAL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES 1 CIRCUIT ALL DEVICES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX PRESERVED DURING DEMOLITION. GROUP CIRCUITS AS SHOWN WITH CIRCUITING. 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.1 1 MAIN LEVEL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS REMODEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.1 2 MAIN LEVEL LIGHTING REMODEL PLAN FJ J UH-2D OS OS OS OFFICE 201 OFFICE 202 OPEN OFFICE 200 987 C D E 2 2 UH-2 OFFICE 201 OFFICE 202 OPEN OFFICE 200 987 C D E a b a a a b b b b b b a,b G1 G1 G1 G1E1 G1 G1 E1 G1 G1G1 G1 E1 1 X1 X1 COPYRIGHT 2015PRELIMINARY DRAWINGSNOT FORCONSTRUCTION12 NORTH BROADWAY BELGRADE, MT 59714 PH: 406-388-3320 FAX: 406-388-3389 ACE JOB #: 15BZ4468 1/7/2016 9:11:22 AME2.2 01.10.2016 1417CITY OF BOZEMANALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. INTERIOR ALTERATION20 EAST OLIVE STREET, BOZEMAN, MT 59715UPPER LEVEL ELECTRICAL REMODEL PLANSELECTRICAL KEYNOTES 1 PROVIDE LABEL WITH GREEN LETTERING, "DAYLIGHT ZONE" ON SWITCHPLATE ABOVE SWITCH. 2 PROVIDE CONNECTION TO ELECTRIC HEATER. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES 1 CIRCUIT ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX PRESERVED DURING DEMOLTION. 2 CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHALL BE LEVITON ODC05-MDW OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 3 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCHES SHALL BE LEVITON ODS15-ID OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. ELECTRICAL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS GENERAL NOTES 1 CIRCUIT ALL DEVICES TO NEAREST JUNCTION BOX PRESERVED DURING DEMOLITION. GROUP CIRCUITS AS SHOWN WITH CIRCUITING. 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.2 1 UPPER LEVEL POWER AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS REMODEL PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"E2.2 2 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING REMODEL PLAN